JP7147929B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines , shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. In such a gaming machine, a predetermined game value is imparted to the player by causing the game ball to enter the big winning hole opened during the winning state, so that the player enjoys winning. can be made to play .

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 has shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, and a first flow path through which game balls shot by the shooting means can flow down. , a second flow path different from the first flow path, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the first ball entry means a first variable means capable of changing between a first position where a game ball can enter and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter into said first ball entering means than said first position; A second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and the third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means. a fourth position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter into the second ball entry means than the position; a second variable means that can be changed to a fourth position; a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; advantageous game execution means for executing a series of advantageous games advantageous to the player on the basis that the determination result of the means becomes a predetermined specific determination result; A first privilege is provided based on the game ball entering the ball means, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means during execution of the predetermined advantageous game. a privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege having a degree of advantage lower than that of the first privilege; a first variable execution means for varying the first variable means to the first position when a first variable condition is satisfied while the game is running; When a second variable condition is established while being varied to the second position, a state in which the possibility of a game ball entering the second ball entering means is higher than that of the first ball entering means. and a second variable execution means capable of varying the second variable means so as to form a As a condition for varying the second variable means, after the second variable means is changed to the third position, the first and a second condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period of time elapses after the second variable means is varied to the third position, and the second variable execution means has at least When the second variable condition is satisfied during the execution of the predetermined advantageous game, the game ball moves to the second flow path The second variable means is varied in a predetermined variable manner such that the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition even if the game ball is continuously shot in a specific direction that can flow in. It is a configuration that allows

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it has a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, a first flow path through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can flow down, and the first flow path. A second flow path different from the path, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means. and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means than the first position, and the second flow path. A second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down can enter, a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, and the third position rather than the third position. 2. A fourth position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means; Advantageous game execution means for executing a series of advantageous games advantageous to the player based on a predetermined specific determination result; A first privilege is granted based on the entry of a ball, and the first privilege is granted based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means during execution of the predetermined advantageous game. privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege having a lower degree of advantage; and during execution of the predetermined advantageous game, the first a first variable execution means for changing the first variable means to the first position when the variable condition is satisfied; When a second variable condition is satisfied while being varied, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entering means than the first ball entering means. and a second variable execution means capable of varying the second variable means so as to change the second variable means from the third position to the fourth position. As conditions, a first condition that is satisfied when the entry of a specific number of game balls into the second ball entry means is detected after the second variable means is changed to the third position; and a second condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period of time elapses after the variable means is changed to the third position, and the second variable execution means has at least the predetermined advantageous game. When the second variable condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific method in which the game ball can flow into the second flow path A configuration capable of varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable mode in which the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition even if the game ball is continuously shot in the direction. is .

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the three-pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a continuous advance notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a continuous advance notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the change over time of the performance mode from when the execution of the continuous notice performance is determined in the state of two reserved balls to the execution of one variable display after the end of the continuous notice performance. It is a diagram schematically showing the. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) defines the big hit variation pattern table in the first embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (d) is the first embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table in a form; It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. 2A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. . FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a notice selection table in the first embodiment; FIG. In the first embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of logical sum data generated when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is cancelled. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is the configuration of the random number range selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a winning random number range pattern table. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a point selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a subordinate random number table in the second embodiment. and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a selection table for cancellation in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing random number range command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect setting process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, (b) is the value of the high expectation level type flag in the third embodiment, the expectation level of the lottery result is a diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between . 14 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing advance notice effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the lottery state after winning the jackpot. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 4 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing status command processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing cancellation determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a modification of the fourth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to a modification of the fourth embodiment; 1 is a block diagram shown; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an ending selection table in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing state command processing 5 executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a sound lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front view of a detour accessory in the fifth embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during a big hit displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is closed, and (b) is a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device is opened in the sixth embodiment. It is the front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being set. (a) is a sectional view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is completely opened; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a completely closed state; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the state of the right specific winning opening when an opening pattern enabling V winning is set in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize is set. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing in more detail the state of the opening/closing door during one open period when an opening pattern capable of winning a V prize is set in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device at the start of one round of big wins in which an open pattern capable of winning a V prize is set. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) is the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big-hit operation|movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display device in the probability variation state displayed with the 3rd design display device in 7th Embodiment, and in the time saving state. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment, (b) is the main control in the seventh embodiment It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the device. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 8 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third modification of the seventh embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing game balls to flow down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that shoots game balls to the front area of the game board 13 and guides the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing game balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the game ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sand beach stage" and a "deep sea stage." ing. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the themes given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Beach stage”→…. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sand beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. A ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When a ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, game balls are operated in accordance with the operation. will be lent out. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player is arranged to hit the game ball to the front surface of the game board 13, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for pressing down, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable switch for detecting the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 by changes in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A game ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, thereby hitting the game ball onto the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the lower portion of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front, and is operated when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the game balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear parts of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front surface of the game board 13. A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of the ball. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13, and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a game ball is launched). is flowing down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball. , the momentum is attenuated and bounced back to the central part side. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and when a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a normal symbol ( 2nd pattern) will be drawn. In the lottery for the special pattern performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot. is also determined. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a normally closed is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or 10 game balls are won. until), and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, since a large amount of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot type of the special pattern, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game in accordance with these jackpot types is provided. (game value) is given to the player.

Also, when the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (eg, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is the first symbol. It is shown by the display device 37 and is also shown by the third pattern display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed and the variable display according to the lottery. is started. The specific prize winning opening 65 a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first ball entry opening 64 . Therefore, during the special game state, since the player hits the game ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, many game balls enter the first ball entering hole 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. become easy to do. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is changed to the first pattern display device 37. , and is also shown in the second symbol reserve lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols. When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R jackpot). Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol variable probability) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high-probability state of special symbols continues until the next big hit of special symbols. On the other hand, after the "jackpot B" is completed, the winning probability of the normal symbols is increased as an added value until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, the so-called special symbol probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot ). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' (during time-saving of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the game ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁. On the other hand, when it is not ``time saving state of normal pattern'', it is called ``normal state of normal pattern'', which means that the probability of winning the normal pattern is normal (the probability is lower than during time saving).

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of jackpot, and depending on the type of jackpot, after the jackpot ends "High probability state of special symbols". Or it is changing whether it will be a "short-time state of normal patterns". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, as a time-saving state of normal symbols, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is lengthened, or the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened for one normal symbol is increased. Also good.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a game ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 is not changed yet. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of certain game balls (held balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are 9 types of main patterns to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and sub patterns consisting of shell-shaped patterns. It is configured. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower one-sixth of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls, an announcement character, and the like.

In the display screen (display area) of the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main pattern of "4" is additionally arranged in each of the main patterns, and one sub-pattern is arranged between these main patterns. That is, only the medium symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols, ie, 10 main symbols and 10 sub-symbols. On the display screen, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), in the main display area Dm, three symbols are stop-displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are stop-displayed. It is designed to be Five effective lines are set on the display screen, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 (see FIG. 4A). Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol row Z1 is formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 ends, it is determined that a big win has occurred, and a big win moving image is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols". When a "jackpot B", which is a 16R normal jackpot, occurs, a combination of the same normal symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to the "probability variation symbols". When the combination of the same variable probability symbols is stopped and displayed, a "jackpot A" that is a 16R probability variable jackpot is generated. It should be noted that, in a part of the case where "jackpot A" occurs, after the combination of the same normal symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect (so-called promotion effect) is performed in which the normal symbol is changed to a probability variable symbol. be. As a result, even when the normal symbols are aligned (or likely to be aligned), the player can continue to have expectations for the probability variable jackpot.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Also, the symbols variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as symbols.

Further, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81, one reserved ball number pattern (“○” symbol) is displayed for each reserved ball number. number of balls is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, the reserved ball number is displayed. Indicates that the number of balls is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The example of FIG. 4B shows an example in which two reserved ball number symbols are displayed, indicating that the number of reserved ball numbers is two.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the third pattern display device 81, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four is displayed for the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a description will be given of continuous advance notice effects, which are one type of display effects in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which the same system of advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays. Whether or not this continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined when a new start winning for the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When the execution of the continuous advance notice performance is decided, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved ball held at the time of detecting the new starting winning and the variable display based on the new starting winning. Although the details will be described later, the determination ratio of the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the lottery result of the new starting prize. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win.

FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the variable display which is executed based on the held balls other than the held ball which is executed last among the held balls for which the continuous notice effect is set. be. FIG. 5(a) shows a state in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row Z2 is changing. As shown in FIG. 5(a), during execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the third symbols having the same number attached to the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 5(a), the main symbols with the number "3" are displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row Z1 and on the right side of the lower symbol row Z2. Further, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the main symbols with the same number are displayed in a mode in which the periphery thereof emits light (a mode different from that of the other third symbols). This allows the player to easily recognize that the continuous announcement effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the mode in which the periphery of the main symbol emits light is referred to as "a mode with an aura".

As shown in FIG. 5(b), during execution of the continuous announcement effect, even if the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with the number "3" in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. It is stopped and displayed in a manner wrapped in an aura. As a result, even though the combination of the displayed symbols is a combination that is not a winning combination, the expectation for the big win (the lottery result corresponding to the big win is included in the reserved balls) is improved. can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display mode when the final variable display in the continuous advance notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 6(a), when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect, the same number is attached to one of the effective lines. The displayed main symbols are stopped and displayed, and the main symbols attached with the same numbers are displayed in a manner enveloping an aura. The example of FIG. 6(a) illustrates a case where the main symbols with the number "3" are stopped and displayed on the activated line L4. This state in which one symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is fluctuating and the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed on the activated line is referred to as a ready-to-win state. In addition, in the present first embodiment, the ready-to-win state is always generated in the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. That is, it is configured such that the start of the continuous advance notice effect can be determined only when the new starting prize is a lottery result corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the ready-to-win state. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to recognize that at least the ready-to-win state will occur after the start of the continuous notice effect, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), when the reach state occurs, a display region HR1 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is formed in the upper right of the main display region Dm, and "reach!!! ” is displayed. The display content of the display area HR1 allows the player to more easily understand that the ready-to-win state has occurred.

FIG. 6(b) shows an example of a display mode in which the medium symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect, and a big win is announced. When a big hit is reported in the continuous advance notice effect, the main symbols with the same numbers as the main symbols with auras, which are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, respectively, are already displayed. It is stopped and displayed on the active line on which the main symbol that is stopped and displayed is arranged. In other words, an effect is executed in which the main symbols with the same number and in the form of wearing an aura are aligned on one effective line. FIG. 6(b) illustrates the case where the main symbols with the number "3" are aligned on the activated line L4. By arranging three main symbols with the same number on the activated line, the player can easily understand that a big win has been achieved. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, characters "Congratulations!!" are displayed to congratulate the winning of the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to give the player greater satisfaction.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in each variable display in which the continuous advance notice effect is set, the main symbols that are stop-displayed with an aura are all the main symbols with the same number. there is In other words, in the first variable display of the continuous notice effect, if the main symbol with the number "3" is stopped and displayed with an aura attached to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the second and subsequent variations Also in the display, the three main symbols with the number "3" attached are stopped and displayed with an aura attached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the modes of each variable display in one continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, although not shown in the drawings, there are a number of advance notice effects executed in each variable display in which the continuous notice effect is set, in addition to the effect (notice effect A) in which the stop pattern is changed to a state with an aura. exist. Specifically, when the fluctuations of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped, the main symbols with the same numbers are frozen (announcement effect B), and the main symbols with the same numbers are struck by lightning. At least an effect (announcement effect C) is provided as a type of the continuous notice effect. The advance notice effect C is a type with the highest degree of expectation for a big win, and the notice effect A is a type with the lowest degree of expectation for a big win. Further, the degree of expectation of the notice effect B is set to be higher than that of the notice effect A and lower than that of the notice effect C. In this way, by varying the degree of expectation for a big win according to the type of continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of continuous notice effect as well.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a description will be given of changes over time in the effect mode when the continuous advance notice effect is set. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing how the effect mode changes over time when a new start winning is detected and a continuous advance notice effect is determined in a state where there are two reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the starting winning (winning A in the upper left of FIG. 7) is detected during the execution of the normal (that is, the continuous notice effect is not set) variable display in the state where there are two pending balls. , a determination as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed. If the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the judgment based on the winning prize A, the variable display based on the two reserved balls held at that time and the variable display based on the winning prize A will be continuous over the variable time. Set so that the advance notice effect is executed. More specifically, the value of the notice number counter 223i indicating the remaining number of continuous notice effects is set to 3, which is the number of times the continuous notice effects are executed, and the type of the determined continuous notice effects (of the notice effects A to C) is set. Either), the value of the notice type flag 223k is updated. As a result, the continuous announcement effect is started from the next variable display (variation display based on the oldest held ball held at the time when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined).

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, a state in which the lottery for the continuous advance notice effect is prohibited (hereinafter referred to as the advance notice lottery prohibited state) is set. This is to prevent (suppress) the repeated determination of the continuous announcement effect during execution of the continuous announcement effect. In more detail, even during the execution of the continuous notice effect, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed based on the detection of a new start winning, the type of notice effect is changed during the continuous notice effect. It may switch. For example, during the execution of the continuous announcement performance with the announcement performance B set, a new start winning prize is detected to determine whether or not the continuous announcement performance can be executed. is interrupted, and there is a possibility that the next change is switched to the advance notice effect A.例文帳に追加In other words, there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed by switching from the effect type (notice effect B) with a relatively high degree of expectation to the effect type (notice effect A) with a relatively low degree of expectation. In addition, if a continuous notice effect of the same effect type is newly determined during the execution of the continuous notice effect, it will continue over the number of times of fluctuation display that is equal to or greater than the number of pending balls that were withheld at the start of the continuous notice effect. The advance notice effect will be executed. As a result, it may become difficult for the player to understand which reserved ball to expect, and thus the meaning of the presentation may become difficult to understand.

In addition, as a method to solve these problems, it is allowed to judge whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect only when the start winning corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the execution of the continuous notice effect that will eventually be lost. Moreover, it is also conceivable to configure the effect type of the additionally determined continuous advance notice effect to have a degree of expectation higher than the effect type of the continuous advance notice effect being executed. However, in this case, every time a starting prize is detected during execution of the continuous announcement effect, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions and perform control processing for determining whether the continuous announcement effect can be executed and the announcement type. , there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, after the end of the continuous notice effect, one fluctuation display (first detected in the advance notice lottery prohibited state) Until the variable display based on the winning B) is completed, it is prohibited to newly determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance type from being switched during execution of the continuous advance notice performance, or the continuous notice performance being continued beyond the number of balls held at the start of the continuous notice performance. Furthermore, at the time of starting winning, it is determined whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state (whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h, which will be described later, is turned on), and in the case of the notice lottery prohibition state, whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. Since it is only necessary to perform a simple control of skipping the determination processing of , the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 7, during execution of the three-time variable display in which the continuous advance notice effect is set, the above-described advance notice lottery prohibition state is set. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, when the start winning is detected during the execution of the second or third variable display of the continuous notice effect, the determination processing of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed for the start win is skipped. In addition, the advance notice lottery prohibited state continues during the execution period of the first variable display after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, and the advance notice lottery is continued at the end of the first change display after the end of the continuous notice effect. Prohibition is lifted. Therefore, when a new start winning prize is detected during execution of the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice effect, the processing for determining whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed for the starting win is performed by the continuous notice effect. Skipped as if running. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement effect from being started again immediately after the continuous announcement effect ends and the continuous announcement effect continuing endlessly. If, after the end of the continuous notice effect, the setting of the continuous notice effect is allowed from the first variable display to be executed, the variable display based on the start winning that triggered the start of the first continuous notice effect will end. Even after that, the effect mode becomes as if the continuous advance notice effect continues. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will not know what the continuous advance notice effect was started based on, and there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the meaning of the continuous notice effect. In other words, the continuous notice effect is not executed based on the lottery result (variation type) read ahead at the time of starting winning, but is a effect that merely changes the effect mode over a fixed number of times of variable display. There is a risk of misunderstanding. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, at least one variable display can be executed in a normal mode (mode without notice effect). The player can easily understand whether or not the game has ended. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand how many times the variable display (what number of the held ball) should be expected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the lottery results of all the balls held at that time are determined, and the determination result is determined. Based on, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. The details of the determination method will be described later, but by determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all the pending balls, It is possible to suppress the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation.

In other words, if the timing at which the start winning is detected is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in order from the oldest pending ball in terms of time, the continuous notice effect is not determined without determining the new pending ball in terms of time. may be decided. In this case, the pending ball for which the continuous notice effect is determined is a lottery result with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, a pending ball that is lost after normal reach), and the degree of expectation is high among the pending balls that are new in terms of time. If a ball with a high reserve (for example, a ball with a super reach that becomes a big hit) is included, the expectation level There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which a continuous notice effect is not set for a high holding ball. Therefore, there is a possibility that expectations for the continuous announcement effect will be spoiled.

Conversely, if the timing at which the start winning is detected is configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed in order from the pending ball that is new in terms of time, the continuous notice will not be determined without discriminating the pending ball that is old in terms of time. There is a possibility that the production will be decided. In this case, the reserved ball for which the continuous notice effect is determined is a lottery result with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, a reserved ball that is lost after normal reach), and the degree of expectation is high among the older reserved balls in terms of time. If a high reserve ball (for example, a reserve ball that generates a super reach and becomes a big hit) is included, the expectation level is The continuous notice effect continues until the variable display based on the low holding ball. In other words, there is a risk that the player will have the impression that the continuous advance notice effect has become sluggish.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all the reserved balls. It is possible to set a continuous announcement effect that continues until the lottery result with the highest degree of expectation. Therefore, despite the fact that the continuous notice effect is set for the ball with low expectation, the situation that the continuous notice effect is not set for the ball with high expectation, and the suspension with high expectation during the continuous notice effect It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the balls are digested and the held balls with low expectations are digested in the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous advance notice effect.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set from the determination of execution of the continuous advance notice effect to the end of the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice effect. However, it is not limited to this. The condition for canceling the advance lottery prohibition state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, the number of variable displays for which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set may be increased (for example, five times). By configuring in this way, more normal aspects (modes without advance notice effects) of variable display are displayed between the end of one continuous advance notice effect and the start of the next continuous advance notice effect. Since it can be executed, it is possible for the player to more reliably recognize whether or not one continuous advance notice effect has ended. Further, as the number of times of variable display in which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set is increased, the chances of determining the continuous advance notice effect are reduced, so that the rarity of the continuous notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she has seen a rare performance just by starting the continuous advance notice performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the cancellation condition of the advance notice lottery prohibition state was defined by the number of times of the variable display (after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, until the end of one fluctuation display), but the cancellation condition is It is not necessarily limited to the number of times of variable display. For example, the release condition may be determined based on the elapsed time after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. More specifically, it may be configured such that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the continuous advance notice effect is completed. With this configuration, even if there is a player who ends the game at the end of the continuous advance notice effect, if the next player starts the game after the lapse of the predetermined period, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled. A game can be played in the state where the Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the succeeding player starts the game from the advance notice lottery prohibited state, so that the continuous advance notice effect can be enjoyed more.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is configured to be set over the period from the end of the continuous advance notice effect to the end of one variable display, but the notice is given immediately after the end of the continuous notice effect. The configuration may be such that the lottery prohibition state is canceled. In this case, it may be configured such that the player can easily identify whether or not it is the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect from the effect mode. By configuring in this way, the period in which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set can be shortened, so that the opportunities for executing the continuous advance notice effect can be increased. As a specific example of the effect mode indicating whether or not it is the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect, for example, the number of remaining fluctuations of the continuous advance notice effect may be counted down. In addition, it may be configured to display a display suggesting the end in the last variable display (for example, the characters "end", etc.), or to have a configuration in which the same music is played continuously during the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect is performed. The music may be stopped at the timing when the last variable display in . Further, during execution of the continuous advance notice effect, it may be configured such that the ready-to-win state does not occur in the third symbol display device 81 in the variable displays other than the last variable display. That is, it may be configured such that the ready-to-win state is displayed during execution of the continuous advance notice effect to indicate that it is the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state, As a stop symbol after the end of variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a state in which game balls can easily enter the first ball inlet 64 is achieved. The number of times the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. be. Four second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the number of game balls passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, a lottery for a special symbol is made by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 shows a display according to the result of the lottery. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings through which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form as.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . A game ball that has not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66. - 特許庁The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is formed by unitizing a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out game balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). I have. The tank 130 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later, is stored. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting winning is one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a. , it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9(b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. is defined in association with Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 9(b)). In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbols (see 202c1 in FIG. 9(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" are defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 11, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. 1st hit type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the off in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for initial value setting of the 1st hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 29). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through either the left or right normal entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 29).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a first winning random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is When the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table matches, it is determined as the big win of the special symbol. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low) and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) that are determined to be winning in each game state in a special symbol lottery are set. Specifically, when the special symbol is in a probability variable state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 9" in the special symbol lottery. 9", it is determined to be a jackpot. Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first hit random number counter C1, the decision values for the big hit are 10 values of ``0 to 9''. The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). Also, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is "0". Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first winning random number counter C1, the decision value for a big hit is only 1 of ``0''. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random numbers that become the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table for the low probability and the random numbers that become the jackpot stored in the first random number table for the high probability are used. In order to prevent duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol of the RAM 203 It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 9B, in this first winning type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 49" is "jackpot A" (FIG. 9 (b) 202b1). Also, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(c)). Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that two types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. .

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and back" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and rear out" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol reserved ball in the RAM 203 It is stored in the storage area 203a.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A table for time is selected, and "completely out" is less likely to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is, as described above, of the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202 .

Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will now be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10(c) ) and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10(d)) are set at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 10(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is a large winning. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Selection is made from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for failure. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the low probability state of the special symbol. . When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for the outlier reach, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" Normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range, "150 to 197" out of range Super reach (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the lost (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 10(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , and in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach reach) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is held and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As described above with reference to FIG. 9(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28" (FIG. 9(c) ) at 202c1). These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 displays the normal pattern. is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204" (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)). These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability state, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 displays the normal pattern. is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "o" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the time of the variable display is extremely shortened from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of the normal pattern is low, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the game ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 29).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up processing (see FIG. 28) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable flag. 203e and a counter 203f during time saving.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), each of which has a first per random number counter C1. , the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the jackpot of the original special symbol is immediately won. Aside from the lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a. Further, if the advance notice lottery is not prohibited, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the various information notified by the winning information command.

Like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data into a reserved area with an area number that is one smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S405 in FIG. 24). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the holding ball of the variable display held by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203d counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball through the normal entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 25).

When the game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of change display in normal symbols is reserved) is less than 4, the second hit random number The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 26: No).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The variable probability flag 203e is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the lottery for special symbols results in a big win, the setting is set to OFF when setting the start of the big win (see S213 in FIG. 22).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is ON, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e is in the state. is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 23).

The time-saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203f during time saving is set to zero, and the lottery of special symbols is performed in the main controller 110, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the big win B every time the big win B is reached. (See S1013 in FIG. 30). In addition, regardless of the type of big win, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the big win.

When the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f and the state of the probability variation flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability variation flag 203e is on. If so, it is determined that it is during the time reduction of the normal pattern. In this case, based on the second winning random number table for high probability, a lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S509 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is normally determined as the normal state of the symbol, and the second per random number table for low probability time Based on, A lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 25).

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that, when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to shoot a game ball, the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. be. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. - 特許庁

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. First, FIG. 12A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12(a), the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an advance notice selection table 222b.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the variation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the main controller 110. be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, an advance notice effect setting process, which is one process in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36), is performed. (See FIG. 37), one variation pattern (detailed display mode of variation effect) is determined (specified) from among the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a (see S4603 and S4605 in FIG. 37). In the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern table 222a, information including presence/absence of the announcement effect and the type of the announcement effect is defined.

The advance notice selection table 222b is a data table referred to when determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Details of the advance notice selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the advance notice selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 13, the advance notice selection table 222b is a data table that defines the range of random numbers (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) for determining each of the advance notice effects A to C for each variation type. When judging whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223f belongs to any range of the random number value (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) associated with each notice effect. , execution of the continuous announcement effect of the effect type associated with the range is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223f does not belong to any range of random numbers defined in the advance notice selection table 222b, it is decided not to execute the continuous advance notice effect.

In this advance notice selection table 222b, six types of variation types are defined: special reach hit, super reach hit, normal reach hit, special reach miss, super reach miss, and normal reach miss. Other variation types (long out, short out) are not defined, so they are not subject to the execution of the continuous announcement effect. By limiting the object on which the continuous announcement performance can be executed to the variation type in which the ready-to-win state occurs, it is guaranteed that at least the ready-to-win state is developed at the time when the continuous announcement performance is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a special reach hit, the range of 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) is associated with "notice effect A". A range of 35 random numbers (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 44" is defined in association with "notice effect B", and 15 random values of "45 to 59" are defined. The range of (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) is defined in association with the "notice effect C" (see 222b1 in FIG. 13). Since the effect lottery counter 223f is updated within a range of 100 values from "0 to 99", when the variation type is the special reach hit, the rate at which "notice effect A" is determined is 10% (10/ 100), the ratio of determination of the "forecast effect B" is 35% (35/100), and the percentage of determination of the "forecast effect C" is 15% (15/100). Also, the ratio of not determining the continuous advance notice effect is 40% (40/100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is super reach hit, the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) corresponds to "notice effect A". ``Presentation effect B'' is defined in association with the range of 30 random numbers (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of ``10 to 39'', and 10 values of ``40 to 49'' are defined. The range of the random number (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) is defined in association with the "notice effect C" (see 222b2 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is Super Reach hit, the percentage of determination of "notice effect A" is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of determination of "notice effect B" is 30% (30/100). ), and the rate at which the “notice effect C” is determined is 10% (10/100). Also, the ratio of not determining the continuous advance notice effect is 50% (50/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is determined becomes lower than in the case of winning the special reach. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the ratio at which the advance notice effect A is determined becomes higher than the special reach hit, while the ratio at which the advance notice effect C is determined becomes lower.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is a normal reach hit, the range of 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) is associated with "notice effect A". , "10 to 24" 15 random numbers (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) are defined in association with "notice effect B", and 5 random values "25 to 29" are defined. The range of numerical values (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) is defined in association with the "notice effect C" (see 222b3 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is normal reach hit, the percentage of determination of "notice effect A" is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of determination of "notice effect B" is 15% (15/100). , and the rate at which the “notice effect C” is determined is 5% (5/100). Also, the ratio of not determining the continuous advance notice effect is 70% (70/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effects are determined is lower than in the case of winning special reach or winning super reach. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the ratio of determining the advance notice effect A becomes higher than that of the special ready-to-win win or the super ready-to-win win, while the ratio of determining the advance notice effect C becomes lower.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the fluctuation type is out of special reach, the range of 10 random numbers (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 9" corresponds to "notice effect A". , and the range of eight random numbers (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 17" is defined in association with "notice effect B", and two values of "18, 19" are defined. The range of the random number (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) is defined in association with the "notice effect C" (see 222b4 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of special reach, the percentage of determination of "notice effect A" is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of determination of "notice effect B" is 8% (8/100). ), and the rate at which the “notice effect C” is determined is 2% (2/100). Also, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 80% (80/100). That is, the ratio of determination of the continuous advance notice effects is lower than in the cases of special ready-to-win, super ready-to-win and normal ready-to-win. Further, in the case where the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the ratio at which the notice effect A is determined is higher than the special reach win, the super reach hit and the normal reach win, while the advance notice effect B and C are determined at a lower rate. Become.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of super reach, the range of 9 random numbers (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 8" corresponds to "notice effect A". One random number (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) "9" is defined in association with "notice effect B" (see 222b5 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of Super Reach, the percentage of determination of "notice effect A" is 9% (9/100), and the percentage of determination of "notice effect B" is 1% (1/100). ), on the other hand, there is no possibility that the “notice effect C” will be determined. Also, the ratio of not determining the continuous advance notice effect is 90% (90/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous announcement effects are determined is lower than in the cases of special reach win, super reach win, normal reach win, and special reach loss. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the ratio of the notice effect A to be determined becomes higher than the special reach hit, the super reach hit, the normal reach hit, and the special reach loss, while the notice effect B is determined. lower percentage. Also, the possibility of the announcement effect C being determined becomes zero.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of normal reach, the range of 5 random numbers (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 4” is associated with “notice effect A”. (See 222b6 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of special reach, the rate at which the "notice effect A" is determined is 5% (5/100), but there is no possibility that the foretell effects B and C are determined. Also, the rate of not determining the continuous advance notice effect is 95% (95/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous advance notice effect is determined is lower than that of other variation types for which determination is made as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Further, when the continuous advance notice performance is executed, the probability of the notice performance A being determined becomes higher than the other fluctuation types, while the possibility of the notice performance B and C being determined becomes zero.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the ratio of determining the continuous advance notice effects is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Further, it is configured such that a variation type with a high degree of expectation (a long variation time) has a higher rate of determining the continuous announcement effect than a variation type with a low degree of expectation (a short variation time). As a result, the player's expectation for the big win can be improved at the time when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is started.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the rate at which notice effect A is determined is lower for a variation type with a higher degree of expectation than for a change type with a lower degree of expectation, while the rate at which notice effect C is determined. is configured to be high. Therefore, when the advance notice effect C is started, the player can be strongly expected to win a big win, while when the advance notice effect A is started, the final fluctuation of the continuous advance notice effect can be expected. You can watch the performance with a sense of tension until the display. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the type of the notice effect.

Further, since the advance notice performance B is configured so as not to be selected (determined) when the normal reach is out, when the notice performance B is started, it develops to super reach or higher (super reach out, special reach out) or becomes a big hit. It is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win. Further, since the advance notice performance C is configured not to be selected (determined) when the normal reach is lost or the super reach is lost, when the notice performance C is started, it is decided that it develops into a special reach or a big win. Therefore, when the advance notice effect C is started, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for a big win.

Next, details of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 12(b). FIG. 12(b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol pending ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a fluctuation A time counter 223e, an effect lottery counter 223f, a game state storage area 223g, a notice effect prohibition flag 223h, a notice counter 223i, a notice prohibition release flag 223j, a notice type flag 223k, and another memory area 223z. at least provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning. From, various information obtained when the lottery of special symbols corresponding to the starting winning prize is performed (win or fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is sorted in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the four open areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). stored in That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. In other words, the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a are the respective counters stored in the holding first area to the fourth area in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the main controller 110. Data corresponding to the lottery result based on the value is stored.

Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, when various information based on the new start winning is notified by the winning information command, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the various information. That is, from the notified various information and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, the above-described announcement selection table 222b is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect and the effect type of the continuous announcement effect. By executing the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to continuously make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win over a plurality of times of variable display, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set to prohibit the determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state ends, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the information stored in all areas of the winning information storage area 223a. In addition, when the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, determination is also made as to the number of reserved balls to which the continuous announcement effect is to be continued. With reference to FIG. 14, a detailed description will be given of a method for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the termination of the advance notice lottery prohibition state.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a part of the control process executed with reference to the information in each area of the winning information storage area 223a when the advance lottery prohibition state is terminated (released). As shown within the dashed line of the horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape in FIG. 14, each area of the prize winning information storage area 223a is configured to be able to store 1 byte (8 bits) of data. As shown in FIG. 14, each bit of the 1-byte data is associated with a variation type, and ON bits indicate the variation type of the winning information stored in the area. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, "special reach hit", "super reach hit", "normal reach hit", "special reach miss", "super reach miss", "normal reach miss" in order from the upper bit. ”, “long deviation”, and “short deviation” are associated with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the second bit of the reserved first area is 1 (on), and the other bits are off. It becomes the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data stored in the area. Similarly, in the second pending area of the winning prize information storage area 223a, the 5th bit associated with "special reach out" is set to 1 (on), so the lottery indicated by the data in the second pending area The result (fluctuation type) is "out of special reach". Likewise, the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data of the second reserved area is "short out", and the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data of the third reserved area is "super reach hit". Since the data in the execution area are not used for this control, illustration thereof is omitted.

When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, as shown in FIG. 14, the OR of the upper 6 bits of each reservation area except for the first reservation area is calculated. A logical sum is a logic that becomes true (1) if at least one data among a plurality of data is true (1), and becomes false (0) if all of the plurality of data are false (0). It is an operation. In the example of FIG. 14, data "010100" is generated (calculated) as the logical sum of the upper 6 bits. The reason why the reserved first area is excluded is that the continuous announcement effect in the first embodiment is configured to be executed over at least two variable displays. In other words, if the first reserved area is used as a target for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous notice effect may be set only for one variable display based on the data of the first reserved area. The purpose is to prevent (suppress) this.

In the first embodiment, based on the generated logical sum data, among the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a, the highest degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not to execute continuous advance notice effect) Determine what the data correspond to the held ball with high . More specifically, since the logical sum data indicates that it is data corresponding to the pending sphere with higher expectations as it goes to higher order bits, it is determined whether there is an on (1) bit in the logical sum data. Whether or not is discriminated from the high-order bit side, and when an ON bit is detected, based on the variation type corresponding to the bit, continuous announcement effect is executed from the value of the announcement selection table 222b and the effect lottery counter 223f. Perform a pass/fail lottery. Then, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, search is made for a reserved area in which the bit corresponding to the same degree of expectation (fluctuation type) as the ON (1) bit of the OR data is ON (1). Then, a continuous advance notice effect is set that continues up to the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved area in which the same bit as the OR data is turned on.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, logical sum data is generated based on the data in all the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced compared to the case of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect after confirming the details of the data of all the reservation areas. can. More specifically, for example, when all of the reserved balls are long out or short out (that is, the result of the lottery that is not subject to the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect), in the first embodiment, the logic Since all the bits of the sum data are 0, the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the method of determining each bit of all reserved areas one by one. Also, for example, even if there are a plurality of pending balls to be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, if determination is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit set with 1 data is determined. , it is possible to easily specify the variation type with the highest degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect) in the hold. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining each bit of all reserved areas and specifying a variation type with the highest degree of expectation among a plurality of variation types to be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4208 in FIG. 33). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 Drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S4502 in FIG. 36). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see S4102 in FIG. 32). It is sent to controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 33), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4508 in FIG. 36). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (see S4510 in FIG. 36).

The variable time counter 223e is a counter for counting variable time. This fluctuation time counter is set to a fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation display, and is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, for example. be done. With this fluctuation time counter 223e, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display executed by the main controller 110 can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol on the first display device 37 and the variation time of the variable display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be matched.

The effect lottery counter 223f is a counter used for the lottery of the effect mode, such as determination (lottery) of whether or not continuous advance notice effect can be executed. This effect lottery counter 223f. The value is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When drawing lots for the continuous announcement effect, the announcement type corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f is referred to from the announcement selection table 222b, and the continuous announcement effect is determined.

The game state storage area 223g is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The game state storage area 223g is updated each time a state command output every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is received from the main controller 110 (see S4210 in FIG. 33). The game state storage area 223g is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223g.

The advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state exists, and if this notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON, it means that the advance notice lottery prohibition state exists. On the other hand, if the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off, it means that the state is not the advance notice lottery prohibition state. While this notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on, determination (lottery) as to whether or not continuous notice effect can be executed is prohibited. This advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON when winning the determination (lottery) as to whether or not continuous advance notice effect can be executed (see S4311 in FIG. 34 and S4415 in FIG. 35). In addition, the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to OFF when the fluctuation of the normal (that is, without notice effect) fluctuation display that is executed for the first time after the end of the continuous notice effect is stopped (S4402 in FIG. 35). reference).

The number-of-notices counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of times of the remaining variable display of the continuous announcement effect. This notice number counter 223i is set to a value corresponding to the number of consecutive notice effects to be executed when execution of the consecutive notice effects is determined (see S4310 in FIG. 34 and S4414 in FIG. 35). Further, while the value of the notice number counter 223i is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 each time the timing of starting the variable display is newly reached (see S4604 in FIG. 37).

The advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the first variable display is being executed after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. That is, it is a flag that indicates whether or not a variable display is being executed in which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled after the change. If this notice prohibition release flag 223j is on, it means that the first variable display is being executed after the continuous notice effect is finished, and if it is off, the first time after the continuous notice effect is finished. It means that it is in a state other than the execution of the variable display of This advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON at the start of the first variable display after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (see S4607 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to OFF when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released (see S4402 in FIG. 35).

The notice type flag 223k is a flag indicating the effect type of the continuous notice effect, and is assigned a 3-bit storage area, for example. The 1st bit corresponds to a notice effect A, the 2nd bit corresponds to a notice effect B, and the 3rd bit corresponds to a notice effect C, indicating that the notice effect corresponding to the ON (1) bit is set. Further, when all bits are off (0), it means that the continuous announcement effect is not set.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 33) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 38) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 38).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . FIG. 16 shows a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 16C, on the display screen of the main image at the time of power-on, a variation image at the time of power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. 16(b) and 16(c), the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 17A and 17B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 17B shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 17, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sand beach stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", as shown in FIG. It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 15). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b' and positions b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) numbered from "1" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

Further, image data corresponding to the main symbols with no numerals "1" to "9" are also resident in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "young man" and a "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 stores the character in the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of the back surface is to display one of the back surfaces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from the back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 19).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 38). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 49(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 40B). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 40(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 49A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 50) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 20) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (FIG. 40(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 46) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 20), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 40(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 46). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 50). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 50). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 51).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 40B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 to 30. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the game ball in the normal ball entrance 67. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. In addition, the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on/off the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the shooting control device 112 to shoot a game ball when the game ball shooting is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of suspensions of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the variable probability flag 203e is reset to OFF, the value of the counter 203f during the time saving is reset to 0 (S213), and the start of the jackpot is set. (S214), the process proceeds to S217. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S214, when the main processing (see FIG. 29) jackpot control processing (S904) is executed, branch to S1001: Yes, and the opening command is set be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S212, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215), If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203f (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol is set (S217), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol (whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is ON) (S302). The variable probability flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) with special symbols.

If it is determined that the special symbol probability variation state (the probability variation flag 203e is ON) (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variation state, so the first per random number acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first winning random number table for high probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big win is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the special symbols are not in the probability variation state (the probability variation flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbols. , Based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. Only "0" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with "0", the special symbol jackpot is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Yes), based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A , jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 9B), "50 to 99”, it is determined to be a jackpot B (16R short-time jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 9(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) as described above. After the process of S307 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the defined contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10), normal reach, Determines the variation time of symbol variation such as super reach. After the process of S309 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310 that is executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310 ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 29). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 (winning a prize) is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered (winning) the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times N of variable display in the special symbol is reserved) Acquire (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. , is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, prediction of the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not it is a big win), its stop type (in the case of a big win, the big win type), and its variation pattern. (S407).

By the process of S407, when the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the stop type), and the variation pattern are predicted, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and this process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during an external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S508). Specifically, the value of the counter 203f during time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203e is ON, it is determined that it is a time saving state of normal symbols, and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, And, if the variable probability flag 203e is off, it is determined that it is in the normal state of normal symbols (it is not in the time saving state).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that it is normal symbol time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507, the second per random number table for high probability time Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 9(c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508: No), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second winning for low probability time Based on the random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 9(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S511: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S511, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514), and if it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second design display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S515), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process exit. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, compared to the normal symbol when the probability is low, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds". The pattern lottery frequency increases. Therefore, since the frequency of wins in the lottery of normal symbols increases, the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is easily opened, so that the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. becomes easy.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S519). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S519: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the present is in the time saving state of the normal design (S520), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S520: Yes), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. . On the other hand, in the processing of S520, if it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (not the time-saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and the process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S519, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the processing of S520 to S523 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and determines whether or not the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d ( M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), normal 1 is added to the value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S604). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S814, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S814). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S815, S816).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S815, S816) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S808). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the variable probability flag 203e and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f are read (S811)), and a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the game state indicated by each read value is set (S812). The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the data in the game state storage area 223g of the RAM 223 according to the game state indicated by the state command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the game state immediately after the power is turned on. After the process of S812 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S813), and the process proceeds to the main process, which will be described later. The status command is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and the game status can be notified by lower 2-bit data. That is, the least significant bit is a bit indicating whether or not it is in the time saving state, and if the least significant bit is ON, it indicates that the present is the normal symbol time saving state. On the other hand, when the least significant bit is off, it indicates that the current state is the normal state of the normal design. In addition, it is the bit which shows whether or not the lower 2nd bit data is in the definite variable state, and if the lower 2nd bit is ON, it indicates that the present is in the definite variable state of the special symbol. On the other hand, when the lower 2nd bit is off, it indicates that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol. By determining whether each bit of the state command is on or off, the game state can be easily identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S901). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 24). Also, the winning information command set in the startup winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, when shooting a game ball, a ball shooting signal is transmitted to the shooting control device 112 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether the specified number of game balls have won the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 64a is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 64a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S512 or S513 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 27 has been executed, so the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (S913). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the initialization process (see S801 in FIG. 28) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this processing is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1003: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004). If it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1006). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the game ball is predetermined When a number (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S1007, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not met (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1009, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the processing of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is not the end time of the ending effect. If so (S1011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current big win is the big win A (S1012).

In the process of S1012, if it is determined that the jackpot A is not (that is, the jackpot B) (S1012: No), by overwriting the value of the counter 203f during time saving with 100, 100 times of normal symbols after the jackpot end. A time period is set to be given (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012: Yes), by turning on the probability variation flag 203e, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

In the process of S1013 or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (whether the special symbol is a variable state or a low probability state of the special symbol) is voiced. A status command for notification to the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process is finished.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 31, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 32) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113: Yes in FIG. 32), the power-off processing of S4116 is executed. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

In the processing of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup processing this time was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred. , or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S4116, the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 32). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S4010), the main The game state at the time of power-on indicated by the state command output in the start-up process of the control device 110 (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the game state is stored according to the game state notified by the state command. The data in the area 223g are updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). Analyze the game state at the time of power-on indicated by the state command output in the startup process (see FIG. 28) (S4011), and according to the game state notified by the state command, the game state storage area 223g Data is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to main processing.

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short period (within 1 msec). , S4111 and S4112 for updating the variable display setting process are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/rendering process is a process of monitoring an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and setting an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 . That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect, it is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110), and the processing proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4111). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the command determination process ends, the variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). The command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4201). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S4203) and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S4207). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol ) is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4208). In addition, in the processing of S4208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S4208 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the game ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), or when the lottery for the special symbol is performed. Each time a prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 by the processing of S4208. It can be matched with the value of the counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when the process of S4208 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not a state command has been received from main controller 110 (S4209). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4210), and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the received winning command is analyzed, and the winning information command process for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is executed (S4212). , return to main processing. Details of the winning information command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S4213). Then, when it is determined that the stop command has been received (S4213: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing for canceling the advance lottery prohibition state, and if it is the timing for canceling the advance lottery prohibition state, all pending A stop command process is executed for determining whether or not continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the lottery result of the reserved ball (S4214). The details of this stop command processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4214 is completed, next, stop display of the changing third symbol is set (S4215), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S4216). ) and return to the main process. For example, if the other command is an opening command, an opening command for display is set to the display control device 114, thereby instructing the display control device 114 to start a jackpot opening effect. Also, for example, if the other command is an ending command, by setting an ending command for display to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 is instructed to start a jackpot ending effect.

By executing this command determination process, appropriate processing can be executed according to the command output from main controller 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, details of the winning information command process (S4212) described above will be described. This winning information command process (S4212) is, as described above, a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect.

In the winning information command process (see FIG. 34), first, the information notified by the received winning information command is stored in the reserved area with the smallest number among the empty areas of the reserved first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4302), and it is determined whether or not the read counter value is 2 or more (S4303).

When it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 2 by the processing of S4303 (S4303: No), the number of reserved balls (2 or more) required to execute the continuous notice effect is not reached. This means that the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON ( S4304). In the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4304: Yes), the present state is the notice lottery prohibition state, and the determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed (execution lottery) is prohibited. Since it is in the state of being present, the processing of S4305 to S4311 for performing the execution lottery for the continuous announcement effect is skipped, and the present processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off (S4304: No), the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4305), and the read notice selection table 222b is read. Of these, by comparing the random number (counter value) defined corresponding to the variation type notified by the winning information command this time and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. (S4306). That is, it is determined whether or not one of the random number ranges defined in association with each of the advance notice effects A to C matches the value of the effect lottery counter 223f.

Next, it is determined whether the determination result by the processing of S4306 is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4307), and in the case of the determination result corresponding to the non-execution of the continuous notice effect (S4307: No) , the processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4307, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4307: Yes), first, the effect type of the current continuous announcement effect specified from the announcement selection table 222b Accordingly, the notice type flag 223k is updated (S4308). That is, if the current effect type is the advance notice effect A, the first bit of the advance notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1), and the other bits are set to OFF (0). The second bit of 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF (0), and if the notice effect is C, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF ( 0).

When the process of S4308 is completed, next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4309), and the read counter value is set to the notice number counter 223i (S4310). As a result, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the variable display based on all the currently held balls. When the processing of S4310 ends, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set by setting the notice effect prohibition flag 223h to ON (S4311), and this processing ends.

By executing this winning information command processing (see FIG. 34), it is executed over the variable display based on the held ball held at the time of receiving the current winning information command and the variable display based on the winning information command. It is possible to set a continuous announcement effect to be performed. As described above, the determination ratio of the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the lottery result notified by the winning information command. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, details of the stop command processing (S4214) described above will be described. As described above, this stop command process (S4214) discriminates whether it is the timing when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released. Based on this, it is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the stop command process (see FIG. 35) is executed, it is determined whether the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is ON (S4401), and if it is determined to be OFF (S4401: No ) This means that it is not time to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is ON (that is, it is time to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state) (S4401: Yes), the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to release the notice drawer prohibition state. is set off, and the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set off (S4402). Next, the counter value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4403), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4404).

In the process of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or less (S4404: No), the number of reserved balls required to execute the continuous notice effect is not reached, This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4404: Yes), the number of reserved balls equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls required to execute the continuous notice effect Since it means that it is reserved, each process of S4405 to S4415 for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is executed based on the lottery result (variation type) of each reserved ball.

More specifically, first, the logical sum (see FIG. 14) of the upper 6-bit data in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a except for the first reserved area is calculated (S4405). Then, it is determined whether the most significant bit of the calculated logical sum is 1 (on) (S4406), and if it is on (S4406: Yes), the variation type of the on bit (that is, per special reach) Each process of S4409 to S4415 for determining whether or not continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed at a corresponding rate.

On the other hand, in the process of S4406, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the OR data is not 1 (that is, it is 0) (S4406: No), then the bit one bit lower than the bit determined this time is It is determined whether it is 1 (on) (S4407). In the processing of S4407, if it is determined that the bit lower than one bit is not 1 (that is, it is 0) (S4407: No), it is determined whether the bit determined this time is the least significant bit in the OR data. It is determined (S4408).

In the processing of S4408, if it is determined that the target bit that has been determined this time is not the least significant bit in the logical sum data (S4408: No), the processing proceeds to S4407, and thereafter the processing of S4407 is performed. Either a 1 (on) bit is detected in the determination (S4407: Yes), or in the process of S4408, it is determined that all bits up to the least significant bit are not 1 (on) (that is, they are 0) (S4408 ), the processes of S4407 and S4408 are repeatedly executed.

In the processing of S4407, if a 1 (ON) bit is detected (S4407: Yes), it is determined whether or not continuous announcement effects can be executed at a rate corresponding to the variation type associated with the 1 (ON) bit. Each process of S4409 to S4415 is executed to On the other hand, in the process of S4408, if it is determined that all the bits up to the least significant bit are not 1 (on) (that is, they are 0) (S4408: No), the currently held balls are continuously Since it means that the result of the lottery to be determined whether or not the notice effect can be executed is not included, this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S4406 or the processing of S4407, if a 1 (ON) bit is detected from the OR data (S4406: Yes or S4407: Yes), first, the advance notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is Read out (S4409). Next, based on the variation type associated with the bit detected to be 1 (on) in S4406 or S4407 and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, refer to the read advance notice selection table 222b. It is determined whether or not to execute a continuous announcement effect (whether the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random number specified in the announcement selection table 222b) (S4410).

When the processing of S4410 ends, then, in the determination by the processing of S4410, the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random value specified in the notice selection table 222b). (S4411), and if the determination result is that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not supported (S4411: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4411, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous notice effect (S4411: Yes), first, according to the effect type of the current continuous notice effect specified from the notice selection table 222b Then, the notice type flag 223k is updated (S4412). That is, if the current effect type is the advance notice effect A, the first bit of the advance notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1), and the other bits are set to OFF (0). The second bit of 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF (0), and if the notice effect is C, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF ( 0).

When the process of S4412 is completed, next, the holding areas in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that is the object of this determination is set to 1 (on) are searched in order from the holding fourth area side ( S4413), the value corresponding to the retrieved reservation area is set in the notice number counter 223i (S4414). For example, if the search result is the fourth reserved area, 4 is set to the notice number counter 223i, and for example, if the search result is the second reserved area, 2 is set to the notice number counter 223i.

The reason for searching from the 4th reservation area side is that if there are multiple reservation areas where the search target bit of S4413 is 1 (ON), the continuous notice effect is set over a larger number of reservation balls. be. Specifically, for example, the determination of whether or not to execute the current continuous notice effect is determined by the lottery result corresponding to the variation type of the super reach out, and the super reach out in the reservation fourth area and the reservation second area When data corresponding to is stored, it is possible to first detect super reach out of the fourth reservation area by searching from the fourth reservation area side. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution of continuous advance notice effect over four times of variable display. On the other hand, if it is configured to search from the first reservation area, the search will end when the data out of the super reach of the second reservation area is detected, so the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect becomes smaller (it becomes a variable display for two times based on the data stored in the first and second reserved areas). Therefore, by searching from the side of the reserved fourth area, it is possible to set the continuous advance notice effect over more variable displays, so that the player's sense of expectation is continuously held over a longer period of time. be able to.

When the processing of S4414 ends, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set by turning on the notice effect prohibition flag 223h (S4415), and this processing ends.

By this stop command processing, at the timing when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, based on the data of all the reservation areas excluding the first reservation area of the winning information storage area 223a, logical sum data is generated, and the logic Based on the sum data, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced compared to the case of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect after confirming the details of the data of all the reservation areas. can. More specifically, for example, when all of the reserved balls are long out or short out (that is, the result of the lottery that is not subject to the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect), in the first embodiment, the logic Since all bits of the sum data are 0, the process can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced compared to the method of determining each bit of all reserved areas one by one. Also, for example, even if there are a plurality of pending balls to be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, if determination is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit set with 1 data is determined. , it is possible to easily specify the variation type with the highest degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect) in the hold. Therefore, each bit of all reserved areas is discriminated, and among the plurality of variation types that are subject to the determination of whether or not continuous notice effects can be executed, the degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not continuous notice effects can be executed) is the highest fluctuation It becomes unnecessary to perform processing such as identifying the type. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the process of S4413, the search for the reservation area in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that is the determination target of the continuous announcement effect is turned on is executed in order from the reservation fourth area. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to search in order from the first reserved area. By configuring in this way, when there are a plurality of suspended balls of the variation type specified based on the logical sum data and subject to the determination of whether or not to execute the current continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed. It is possible to suppress the execution of the variation display of the variation type with the same degree of expectation multiple times. That is, for example, when data corresponding to the variation type of super reach out is stored in the second reservation area and the fourth reservation area, when the reservation area is searched from the fourth reservation area side, the fourth reservation area The continuous announcement effect is executed until the variable display corresponding to the data of the area. In this case, in one continuous advance notice effect, super reach out (variation display with high expectation) occurs twice (multiple times). If the highly expected variable display occurs continuously and the expectation for the big win is further heightened by the execution of the continuous advance notice performance during that time, the player is finally out of the game. There is a possibility that the motivation for the game of the person will be greatly reduced. On the other hand, if the reservation area is searched from the first reservation area side, it is possible to minimize the number of times the variation display of the highly anticipated variation type is executed in the 1 continuous announcement effect. , even when the player is out of the continuous announcement effect, the player's motivation for the game can be hardly lowered.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting display variation pattern commands based on the variation pattern commands received from main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S4507. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S4502). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired (S4503).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is set for the variable display to be started based on the current change pattern command, and if it is set, the notice effect setting process for setting the notice effect is executed (S4504). . The details of this advance notice effect setting process (S4504) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S4504 is completed, next, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variable display mode determined in the processing of S4504 is generated, and the command is sent to the display control device. 114 (S4505). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4506). In the process of S4506, the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4507.

In the processing of S4507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4507). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4507: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S4507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S4508). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4509).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, and based on the set stop type, to the display control device 114 A display stop type command for notification is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4510), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37, the details of the above-described advance notice effect setting process (S4504) will be described. This advance notice effect setting process (S4504) is a process executed during the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36). This is a process for determining whether or not it has been set, and setting the advance notice effect if it has been set.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4601). (S4601: Yes) This means that the continuous announcement effect is set for the current variable display, so the announcement type flag 223k is read (S4602). Next, the variation pattern accompanied by the announcement effect indicated by the announcement type flag 223k is determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4603), the value of the announcement number counter 223i is subtracted by 1 (S4604), and this processing is performed. exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the value of the notice number counter 223i is 0 (S4601: No), first, the variation pattern of the aspect without the notice effect is selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a. It is determined (S4605), and then it is determined whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4606). In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4606: Yes), it means that it is time to start the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice effect. The release flag 223j is set to ON (S4607), and this processing ends. By setting the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the processing of S4607, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is continued during the fluctuation period of the variable display to be started this time (the first fluctuation display after the end of the continuous advance notice effect). At the end of fluctuation, the advance lottery prohibition state can be canceled in the stop command process (see FIG. 35) (see S4402 in FIG. 35). After the end of the continuous advance notice performance, the state of prohibition of the advance notice lottery is continued until the first variable display, so that the continuous advance notice performance can be suppressed from being executed again without an interval after the end of the continuous advance notice performance. can.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 51. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 38). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 39, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 49A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 49A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 40B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 40B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and the simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40(a), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 40(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 40(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the next one-frame image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. - 特許庁Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 20, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to F, small hit, front and rear out reach, front and back reach other than front and rear out, complete out ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 41, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402). The command types are analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 42(a). FIG. 42(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device actually produces a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, let us return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG.42(b) is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A to F, small hit, reach out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop design discrimination flags provided for each stop design, the stop design discrimination flag corresponding to the stop design set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop design discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop design is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the command is displayed. If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command processing (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 43(b). FIG. 43(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is for executing the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. This back image change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A and B is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S7002 is used to determine the The type of background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, let us return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, let us return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 42(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 46, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and for each sprite, Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. , you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 49B. FIG. 49B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 50) (see S7501: No in FIG. 49A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Next, referring to FIG. 50, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 40(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute continuous advance notice effects in which similar advance notice effects are executed over a plurality of consecutive fluctuation displays. Whether or not this continuous advance notice effect can be executed is basically determined when a new start winning for the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When the execution of the continuous advance notice performance is decided, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved ball held at the time of detecting the new start winning and the variable display based on the new starting winning. This continuous notice effect is more likely to be determined in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss in the lottery result of a new start prize, so when the continuous notice effect is executed, It can make you feel a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the advance notice lottery prohibition state for prohibiting the lottery of the continuous notice effect is set. This is to prevent (suppress) the repeated determination of the continuous announcement effect during execution of the continuous announcement effect. More specifically, even during the execution of the continuous notice effect, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed based on the detection of a new start winning, the type of notice effect is changed during the continuous notice effect. It may switch. For example, during the execution of the continuous announcement performance with the announcement performance B set, a new start winning prize is detected to determine whether or not the continuous announcement performance can be executed. is cut off, and there is a risk that the next change will be switched to the advance notice effect A. In other words, there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed by switching from the effect type (notice effect B) with a relatively high degree of expectation to the effect type (notice effect A) with a relatively low degree of expectation. In addition, if a continuous notice effect of the same effect type is newly determined during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the number of times of fluctuation display that is equal to or greater than the number of suspended balls that were withheld at the start of the continuous notice effect will continue. The advance notice effect will be executed. As a result, it may become difficult for the player to understand which reserved ball should have a sense of expectation, and thus the meaning of the presentation may become difficult to understand. In addition, as a method to solve these problems, it is allowed to judge whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect only when the start winning corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the execution of the continuous notice effect that will eventually be lost. Moreover, it is also conceivable to configure the effect type of the additionally determined continuous advance notice effect to have a degree of expectation higher than the effect type of the continuous advance notice effect being executed. However, in this case, every time a starting prize is detected during execution of the continuous announcement effect, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions and perform control processing for determining whether the continuous announcement effect can be executed and the announcement type. , there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, and until the end of one variable display, the continuous advance notice effect is newly executed. It is configured such that it is prohibited to determine whether or not it is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the production type from being switched during execution of the continuous advance notice production, or the continuous advance notice production to continue beyond the number of balls held at the start of the continuous advance notice production. can be done. Furthermore, at the time of starting winning, it is only necessary to perform a simple control of judging whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state exists, and if the advance notice lottery prohibition state exists, skip the determination processing of whether or not to execute the continuous notice performance. The processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the lottery results of all the reserved balls that are reserved at that time are determined, and based on the determination result, a continuous advance notice effect is performed. It is configured to determine whether or not the execution is possible. The details of the determination method will be described later, but by determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all the pending balls, It is possible to suppress the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, despite the fact that the continuous notice effect is set for the ball with low expectation, the situation that the continuous notice effect is not set for the ball with high expectation, and the suspension with high expectation during the continuous notice effect It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the balls are digested and the held balls with low expectations are digested in the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the state in which the advance notice lottery is prohibited is continued until one normal variable display (in which the advance notice effect is not set) ends after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. By configuring in this way, normal variable display can be performed at least once after the continuous advance notice effect is finished and before the next continuous notice effect is started. As a result, it is possible to suppress and prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement performance from being started again immediately after the continuous announcement performance is finished and the continuous announcement performance continuing endlessly. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand which of the held balls should have a sense of anticipation during execution of the continuous announcement effect.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, logical sum data is generated based on the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a, and based on the logical sum data Although it has been configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, it is not limited to this. For example, each time a winning information command is received, logical sum data may be generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 223 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of calculating the logical sum data when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, so it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled. The processing load required for determination can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect is executed over all the reserved balls at the time of the decision, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the range of the reserved ball for performing the continuous notice effect may be determined according to the lottery result or the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a continuous notice effect in which a loss is finally notified, the number of consecutive notice effects is configured to be 3 or less, while the success is finally notified. In the case of the notice effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of consecutive notice effects is allowed up to four times. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while paying attention to the number of consecutive notice effects, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect is completed after setting the continuous notice effect over all the reserved balls at the time of the decision. Until now, it has been configured to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state. That is, once the number of consecutive announcement effects in the continuous announcement effect is determined, the number of consecutive announcement effects is not increased or decreased, but this is not the only option. For example, even when execution of the continuous advance notice performance is determined, if a new winning information command is received during execution of the continuous notice performance, the execution lottery for the continuous notice performance may be performed. That is, a lottery (continuous announcement extension lottery) may be executed to determine whether or not to extend the continuous announcement effect to the variable display corresponding to the new winning information. In this case, the continuous advance notice extension lottery may be performed only in the case of the continuous notice effect in which the continuous notice effect being executed finally informs the loss. By configuring in this way, the continuous announcement effect can be continuously executed over a larger number of times, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Further, the extension of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only when a new start winning prize is won. By configuring in this way, when the continuous notice performance exceeds the upper limit value of 4, which is the number of reserved balls, the player wins the continuous notice extension lottery, and in addition to winning a jackpot. can also be understood. Therefore, it is possible to play a game by paying more attention to the number of consecutive notice effects during execution of the continuous notice effects.

In the first embodiment, the logical sum of the high-order 6 bits of each reservation area is calculated and used to determine the execution of the continuous announcement effect, but the number is not limited to 6 bits, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 10, etc. can be set arbitrarily according to the Also, the lottery probability (determination ratio) of the continuous advance notice effect corresponding to each lottery result may be determined arbitrarily.

In the first embodiment, only when the number of pending balls is 2 or more, the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the number of reserved balls is one, it may be configured to draw lots to decide whether or not to execute the notice effect. In this case, the variable display of the third symbol accompanied by the advance notice effect is performed once during one variable time (that is, the variable time of the first symbol and the variable time of the third symbol are matched). Alternatively, the variable display of the third symbol accompanied by the advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times during one variable time (that is, the variable display of the third symbol with a shorter variable time than the variable time of the first symbol is executed multiple times. ) may be configured.

In the first embodiment, as a continuous advance notice effect, three identical third symbols are displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbols are displayed when the three third symbols are stopped. Although the advance notice effect displayed in a burning manner has been described, the advance notice effect mode is not limited to this. For example, during execution of the continuous notice effect, it may be configured such that the same (or similar in form) effect occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, when the fluctuation starts) in each fluctuation, or at a predetermined timing (for example, when the fluctuation stops) ) may have the same (or similar in appearance) characters. In addition, a series of productions with a story (for example, a production in which a big hit is notified by fighting an enemy and winning, or a production in which a big hit is notified if you can escape from the enemy, etc.) can be set as a continuous notice production. Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed over all variable displays. Furthermore, when the continuous notice effect is set, it is not necessary to execute the notice effect of the same system in all the variable displays within the setting range. The configuration of the reserved pattern indicating the reserved ball corresponding to is changed to a different form from the usual until the end of the fluctuation (for example, the color of the reserved pattern is changed, the reserved pattern is changed to a predetermined character, etc.). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a player feel expectations for the reserved ball before starting the variable display based on the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol whose mode has been changed.

In the first embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is set, the main symbols with the same numbers displayed in each symbol row are different from the other third symbols mode), but an effect that changes to a different mode may be executed even during execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Specifically, for example, only when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, one main symbol is displayed in the same manner as the advance notice effect, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed with the main symbol having a changed aspect. An effect may be executed in which the main symbols attached with the same numbers as the symbols are not stopped and displayed. Further, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are displayed in the same manner as the notice effect, and when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the manner is changed. An effect may be executed in which the main symbols having the same number as the displayed main symbols are not stopped and displayed. That is, it may be configured such that the same performance mode as that in the case where the advance notice effect is set is performed halfway through, and an effect (so-called fake effect) that is different from the advance notice effect in the middle is executed. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think that the continuous advance notice performance is started until the performance mode different from the notice performance is obtained, so that the player wins the execution lottery of the continuous notice performance for a long period of time. Even if it is not possible to do so, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the continuous announcement effect.

In the first embodiment, the ratio at which the continuous advance notice effects are determined according to the variation type and the ratio of the types of the advance notice effects are variable, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the variation type, it may be configured to vary the rate at which the continuous notice effect is determined according to the jackpot type, or the ratio of the types of each notice effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the type of jackpot in the case of a big win according to whether or not the continuous notice performance is executed and the type of the notice performance, so that the player's interest in the continuous notice performance can be further enhanced. can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when the start winning is detected in a state where the advance notice lottery prohibition flag 223h is not on (the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON), and the winning information command is output to the audio lamp control device 113, the notice is always made. In the selection table 222b, the range of the random number (the value of the effect lottery counter 223f) corresponding to the current variation type is referred to to determine (lottery) whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed (lottery). not a thing For example, if a ball with a higher expectation than the current starting prize (with a lottery result advantageous to the player) is already reserved, the continuous announcement effect may not be drawn by lottery. Hypothetically, if the continuous notice effect is decided in a state where the ball with a higher expectation than the starting prize is already reserved, after the variable display with a high expectation is executed in the middle of the continuous notice effect , a situation occurs in which a variable display with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed in the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. In other words, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation will become an effect of a slump. On the other hand, when a ball with a high expectation is already reserved, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the expectation from falling by adopting a configuration in which the lottery itself of the continuous notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the variable display that is executed at the end of the continuous advance notice effect can create a great sense of anticipation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled when the fluctuation ends once after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled when the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect ends.

In the first embodiment, when the start winning is detected in the state where the advance notice lottery is not prohibited, the judgment as to whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed is performed without limitation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a big win is already included in the hold, it may be constructed so as to avoid the determination of whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous advance notice effect from being interrupted due to a big win in the middle of the continuous notice effect. Further, for example, when the lottery result of the big win is reserved in the first reserved area, the determination of whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed may be avoided. By constructing in this way, even if a big win already exists in the reserve at the time of detecting a new start winning, the fluctuation accompanied by the advance notice effect at least twice until the big win is reported. Display can be performed. That is, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variable display accompanied by the advance notice effect is executed only once and the big win is announced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous advance notice effect is executed to announce the big win, so that the effect can be prevented from becoming unnatural. In this case, at the time of the big hit, the setting of the continuous notice effect is reset, and at the timing when the big hit ends, it is determined whether the continuous notice effect can be executed based on the lottery result (variation type) of each pending ball. It is good also as composition which judges.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 59. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, each time a starting winning prize is detected, the lottery results of special symbols (whether winning or not, fluctuation patterns, etc.) are read in advance from various counter values (random numbers) obtained based on the starting winning prize, The configuration is such that the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the result of prefetching by means of the winning information command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine execution of the continuous announcement effect based on the result of the prefetch notified by the winning information command. Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, by setting the advance notice lottery prohibition state, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the repeated determination of the continuous notice effect. . Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of cancellation is calculated, and the continuous advance notice performance is executed based on the calculated logical sum. It was configured to determine whether or not it was possible. That is, based on the logical sum data, whether or not the suspended ball of the variation type to be judged whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is included in the suspended ball, and the variation with the highest degree of expectation among the current suspended balls It is configured to determine what the type is. Then, if the variation type that is the target for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is included, the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest degree of expectation is used to determine whether the continuous notice effect can be executed ( lottery).

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, points are set according to the type of fluctuation, and the total value of points corresponding to one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be grasped. . During the advance lottery prohibition state, the total points are updated each time a new winning information command is received. It is configured to grasp the variation type included in the ball and determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of starting winning in the main controller 110, the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. It is configured to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the range of values. That is, the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment is configured to determine only the range of acquired values without performing prefetching. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the range of the random number (counter value) notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110 instead of the winning information command. , the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to perform prefetching.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 executes The only difference is that the control processing performed has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 52, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52(a), the ROM 202 of the second embodiment has a random number range selection table 202e added to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 9(a)). is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The random number range selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for specifying the range of values to which various counter values (random numbers) obtained based on starting winnings for the first ball entrance 64 belong. At the start winning, various counter values are compared with the random number range selection table 202e to specify the range of values to which the counter value (random number) belongs (see S412 in FIG. 55). The specified range of counter values (random numbers) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by means of a random number range command (see S413 in FIG. 55).

Details of the random number range selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 52(b) and 52(c). FIG. 52(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number range selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 52(b), the random number range selection table 202e includes a winning random number range table 202e1 for specifying the value range of the first winning random number counter C1 and the value range of the first winning type counter C2. It comprises at least a hit type range table 202e2 for specifying and a variation type range table 202e3 for specifying the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Referring to FIG. 52(c), out of the tables that make up the random number range selection table 202e, taking the winning random number range table 202e1 as an example, an outline of the contents of each table that makes up the random number range selection table 202e will be described. .

As shown in FIG. 52(c), in the winning random number range table 202e1, data (range parameters) indicating the range of random numbers (counter values) are associated with the range of values of the first winning random number counter C1. stipulated. More specifically, the value "0" of the first random number counter C1 (that is, the jackpot random number in the low probability state of the special symbol and the variable probability state) is defined in association with the range parameter "00H". , The range of the value of the first per random number counter C1 "1 to 9" (that is, the jackpot random number in the probability variable state of the special symbol) is defined in association with the range parameter "01H", the first per random number counter A range parameter "02H" is defined in association with the value range "10 to 49" of C1, and a range parameter " 03H” is defined in association with the value range of the first random number counter C1, and a range parameter “04H” is defined in association with the value range “100 to 149” of the first hit random number counter C1. From now on, every 50 random number value ranges are defined in association with different range parameter values.

Referring to this winning random number range table 202e1, for example, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the start winning is "60", the range to which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 belongs is " 50 to 99”, “03H” is specified as the range parameter indicating the range of the current random number. Further, for example, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "375", the range to which the value of the first winning random number counter C1 belongs is "350 to 399". "09H" is specified as the range parameter indicating .

Note that each range defines only determination values corresponding to the same determination result. That is, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "00H", only the judgment value that is judged to be a big win in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. Also, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "01H", only the judgment value for judging the big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined. In addition, in the range corresponding to the range parameters "02H" to "09H", only the determination values determined to be outside are specified. In this way, by configuring each range with only the same kind of determination values, it is possible to establish a one-to-one correspondence between each range and the determination result. In other words, judgment values corresponding to multiple judgment results are mixed in one range, and even if the range is specified, the judgment result using the counter value (random value) in the range cannot be specified. can be suppressed. Therefore, based on the notified range parameter specified by referring to the winning random number range table 202e1, the sound ramp control device 113 side can accurately perform the prefetching process.

Although not shown, the other tables (hit type range table 202e2, fluctuation type range table 202e3) that make up the random number range selection table 202e also have the first hit type counter C2 or the fluctuation type counter CS1. and the value of the range parameter are defined in association with each other. Further, the plurality of ranges set in each table are composed only of determination values corresponding to the same determination result.

As described above, the range parameters specified by referring to each data table defined in the random number range selection table 202e, such as the winning random number range table 202e1, are output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the random number range command. . The voice lamp control device 113 prereads various lottery results (lottery results of special symbols, jackpot types, variation patterns) based on the range of values to which various counter values (random numbers) notified by the random number range command belong. Although the details will be described later, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 defines the range of various counter values (random value) that can be notified by the random number range command and the lottery results based on the various counter values in association with each other. A data table is provided. Upon receiving the random number range command, the audio ramp control device 113 prefetches the lottery result for each counter type based on each data table.

In this way, the range to which the values of various counter values (random numbers) obtained based on the starting winnings belong is output to the audio ramp control device 113, and the received various counter values ( The processing load on the main controller 110 side can be reduced by adopting a configuration in which prefetching is performed based on a data table that defines the correspondence relationship between the range to which random numbers) belong and the lottery results. In other words, when a starting prize is detected, the main controller 110 needs to execute a process of prefetching the lottery result by comparing each random number specified in various data tables with the counter value obtained this time. Instead, it is only necessary to compare the range of values defined in the random number range selection table 202e with the counter value acquired this time. Therefore, by reducing the processing load in the main control unit 110, which performs major control related to the game, such as the lottery for the big win and the update of the display mode of the first symbol, the main control related to the game is reliably executed without delay. can do. Further, instead of outputting the counter value (random value) itself obtained based on the starting prize to the sound lamp control device 113, the counter value (random value) is converted into a value range to which the sound lamp control device 113 belongs. , so even if the random number range command is illegally obtained from the outside, the random number value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) that will be a big hit from the illegally obtained random number range command Can be made less predictable. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring fraud. In addition, on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, based on the notified counter value (random value) range, since it is possible to execute the pre-reading process corresponding to the various counters, special symbol fluctuation start processing in the main control device 110 (Refer to FIG. 23). Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can grasp the prefetch result more accurately.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. First, FIG. 53(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53( a ), the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a point selection table 222 c and a random number table per subordinate, in contrast to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12( a )). 222d, a sub-win type table 222e, a sub-variation type table 222f, and a cancellation selection table 222g are added at least.

The point selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced to identify points corresponding to the fluctuation types identified by prefetching. During the preliminary lottery prohibited state, the point selection table 222c is referred to and the total value of points is updated each time the variation type is specified by prefetching.

Details of this point selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the point selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 54(a), in this point selection table 222c, points are defined in association with each variation type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), "30 points" is defined in association with the variation type "per special reach" (see 222c1 in FIG. 54(a)), and the variation "5 points" are defined in association with the types "per super reach" and "per normal reach" (see 222c2 and 222c3 in FIG. 54 (a)), "missing special reach" and "super reach" "Out of reach" and "out of normal reach" are defined in association with "1 point" (see 222c4 to 222c6 in FIG. 54(a)). On the other hand, other fluctuation types (“long deviation” and “short deviation”) are defined in association with “0 points” (see 222c7 in FIG. 54(a)).

In the second embodiment, when the variation type is specified by prefetching based on the random number range command in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the point selection table 222c is referenced to specify the points corresponding to the current prefetch result. The identified points are added to a point storage area 223m, which will be described later. As a result, in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the points corresponding to all the reserved balls can always be updated at the same time as the prediction.

Returning to FIG. 53(a), the description continues. The secondary winning random number table 222d, the secondary winning type table 222e, and the secondary variation type table 222f are respectively the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter output from the main controller 110 by the random number range command. Based on the range of values to which each of CS1 belongs, it is a data table referred to in order to look ahead for the propriety of the special symbol, the type of jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern. The configuration of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 54(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the secondary winning random number table 222d. As shown in FIG. 54(b), in this secondary random number table 222d, for each game state (special symbol low probability state, high probability state), the range of random numbers determined as a special symbol jackpot (range parameters) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), "00H" is associated and defined as the range (range parameter) of the random number value determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol (FIG. 54 ( b) 222d1 reference), "00H, 01H" is associated and defined as the range (range parameter) of the random number determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol (222d2 in FIG. 54(b) reference).

Although not shown, the other data tables (subordinate winning type table 222e, subordinate fluctuation type table 222f) also have range parameter values corresponding to the first winning type counter C2 or fluctuation type counter CS1. and the determined jackpot type or variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

When receiving the random number range command, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts range parameters corresponding to the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 notified by the command, and extracts them. The value of each range parameter is compared with the sub-hit random number table 222d, the sub-hit type table 222e, and the sub-variation type table 222f, and the special symbol lottery result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern are read ahead. Based on the notified counter value (random value) range, it is possible to execute the pre-reading process corresponding to the various counters. Prefetching can be executed under similar conditions by various lotteries. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can grasp the prefetch result more accurately. When the look-ahead process ends, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, as in the first embodiment. In addition, in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, instead of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, the points corresponding to the fluctuation type specified by the look-ahead are identified by referring to the point selection table, and the data in the point storage area 223m. process to update the

Returning to FIG. 53(a), the description continues. The cancellation selection table 222g is a data table that is referred to when performing a lottery for continuous advance notice effects when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is cancelled. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, continuous advance notice is obtained by comparing the average value of the points obtained by dividing the points stored in the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls and the cancellation selection table 222g. It determines whether or not the performance can be executed.

Here, the details of the cancellation selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 54(c). FIG. 54(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the cancellation selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 54(c), the cancellation selection table 222g includes an effect lottery counter 223f for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect for each range of the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223m. A range of values is specified for each.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), when the average point value (A) is greater than 5, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect A is set to "0 to 19" are defined in association with each other, and as the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect B, "20 to 49" are defined in correspondence and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect C. As the range of , "50 to 59" is associated and defined (see 222g1 in FIG. 54(c)).

In addition, when the average value (A) of the points is 5 or less and is greater than 1, "0 to 4" is associated as the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect A. The value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect B is defined to correspond to "5 to 19", and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect C is "20 to 29" are defined in association (see 222g2 in FIG. 54(c)). Further, when the average value (A) of the points is a value of 1 or less, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect A is defined in association with "0 to 8". As the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to , "9" is associated and defined (see 222g3 in FIG. 54(c)). When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the cancellation selection table 222g enables lottery (judgment) as to whether or not continuous advance notice performance can be executed with a lottery probability (judgment ratio) corresponding to the average value of points.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The RAM 223 of the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 12B) in that a point storage area 223m is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The point storage area 223m is a storage area for storing and updating the total value of points corresponding to the variation type of each reserved ball while the advance notice lottery is prohibited. In this point storage area 223m, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the total value of the value obtained by converting the variation type corresponding to all the suspended balls to points is stored (see FIG. 57). (see S4713). The points stored in this point storage area 223m are received every time a random number range command is received based on a new start winning, and prefetch processing is executed based on the range of the random number value (counter value) notified by the command. , points corresponding to the fluctuation type specified by the look-ahead are added and updated (see S4705 in FIG. 57). Further, when a new variable display is started during the advance notice lottery prohibited state, points corresponding to the variation type of the variable display to be started are subtracted and updated (see S4613 in FIG. 59).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 55, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment. This starting winning process 2 (S111) is a process executed instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. 64 (start winning).

Of the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, each process of S401 to S406 is the same as each process of S401 to S406 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. In addition, in the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when the process of S406 is completed, next, the random number range selection table 202e (see FIG. 52(b)) is read out (S411), The range of values (range parameter) to which each counter value (random number) belongs is specified by comparing the obtained random number range selection table 202e with the acquired various counter values (random number) (S412). Next, a random number range command for notifying the value range (range parameter) to which the specified counter value (random value) belongs is set (S413), and this process is terminated.

The random number range command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the random number range command, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts range parameters corresponding to various counter values (random numbers) from the random number range command, By comparing with the variation type table 222f, the lottery result based on the start winning of this time is prefetched.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. FIG. First, the command determination process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This command determination process 2 (4121) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, and similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, This is a process for judging a command received from main controller 110 and executing corresponding control.

Of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, S4201 to S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 each correspond to S4201 to S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 is executed.

In the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then whether or not the random number range command has been received is determined. (S4221), and if it is determined that the random number range command has been received (S4221: Yes), prefetching is performed based on the value range (range parameter) to which the various counter values belong, notified by the random number range command. random number range command processing is executed (S4222), and this processing ends. The details of this random number range command process (S4222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4221 that the random number range command process has not been received (S4221: No), the process proceeds to S4213. In the process of S4213, if it is determined that a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4213: Yes), instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, stop command process 2 is executed. (S4223), and the process proceeds to S4215. The details of this stop command process 2 (S4223) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the random number range command process (S4222) executed when the random number range command is received in the above-described command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. This random number range command process (S4222) is, as described above, a process for prefetching based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command.

In this random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), first, the range parameter for each counter type notified by the random number range command is compared with the subordinate winning random number table 222d, the subordinate winning type table 222e, and the subordinate fluctuation type table 222f. (S4701). That is, the range parameter corresponding to the first winning random number counter C1 is the secondary winning random number table 222d, the range parameter corresponding to the first winning type counter C2 is the secondary winning type table 222e, and the range parameter corresponding to the variation type counter CS1 is The result of the lottery is prefetched by comparing with the sub-fluctuation type table 222f. Then, the prefetch result obtained by the process of S4701 is stored in the free area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4702).

Next, it is determined whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4703), and if it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4703: Yes), it is in the notice lottery prohibition state, so points are stored. A process is executed to update the points stored in area 223m. Specifically, the point selection table 222c is read (S4704). Then, the point corresponding to the prefetch result obtained by the process of S4701 is read from the point selection table 222c, the read point is added to the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4705), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4703, if it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off (S4703: No), then it is determined whether the number of pending balls is 2 or more (S4706). That is, it is determined whether or not the minimum number of reserved balls necessary for executing the continuous announcement effect is reserved. In the processing of S4706, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is 1 or less (S4706: No), it means that the number of pending balls is less than the minimum required for executing the continuous notice effect, so this processing is continued as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S4706, if it is determined that the number of held balls is 2 or more (S4706: Yes), it means that the minimum number of held balls required for executing the continuous notice effect is reserved. Therefore, based on the variation type specified from the range parameter notified by the random number range command this time, a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed.

Specifically, first, the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4707), and the fluctuation type specified by this prefetch and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f are compared with the read notice selection table 222b. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed (S4708). Next, in the determination of S4708, it is determined whether or not the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4709), and if the continuous notice effect is not executed (S4709: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4709, if it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed (S4709: Yes), first, the notice type flag 223k is updated according to the effect type of the notice effect specified from the notice selection table 222b ( S4710). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4711), and the read counter value is set as the value of the notice number counter 223i (S4712). Next, by comparing the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a with the point selection table 222c, the variation type of each reserved ball is converted into points. (S4713). Then, the total value of the points is stored in the point storage area 223m (S4714), the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4715), and this process is terminated.

With this random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), it is possible to accurately execute prefetch processing based on the range parameters notified by the random number range command.

Next, details of the stop command process 2 (S4223) described above will be described with reference to FIG. This stop command process 2 (S4223) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

In each of S4401 to S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 of the stop command process 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, S4401 to S4401 of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 are executed.

In addition, in the stop command process 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4404 is completed, the point stored in the point storage area 223m is read (S4421), and the read point is 0. (S4422). In the processing of S4422, if it is determined that the read point is 0 (S4422: Yes), the held balls that are held include the held balls that are subject to the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect. Since it means that there is not, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4422, if it is determined that the read value is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4422: No), the holding ball corresponding to the variation type to be determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect indicates that at least one is reserved, so first, the average value (A) is calculated by dividing the points read from the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls (the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b) ( S4423).

Next, by comparing the average value (A) calculated in the process of S4423 with the cancellation selection table 222g (see FIG. 54(c)), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed (S4424), The process proceeds to S4411.

In addition, in the stop command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4412 is completed, the holding area in which the data corresponding to the expected holding ball corresponding to the range of the average value is stored , sequentially from the reserved fourth area in the prize information storage area 223a (S4425), and the process proceeds to S4414. For example, if the average value (A) is 1 or less, it means that at least one of special reach out, super reach out, and normal reach out is included in the held ball, so the hold number 4 area sequentially, search the holding area in which the data corresponding to the variation type corresponding to the deviation with reach is stored.

In addition, in the stop command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4415 ends, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are reset to 0 (S4426), and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, details of the advance notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this advance notice effect setting process 2 (S4521). This notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) is a process executed in place of the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable display to be started based on the current variation pattern command, and setting the announcement effect if it is set.

In each process of S4601 to S4607 of the notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, each process of S4601 to S4607 in the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the advance notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 is completed, then the point selection table 222c is read (S4611), and the current execution is executed from the read table. A point corresponding to the variation type of the variation display to be started is identified (S4612). Then, the value stored in the point storage area 223m is updated by subtracting the point specified in the process of S4612 (S4613), and this process ends. By executing this advance notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59), the points stored in the point storage area 223m can always be maintained at the total value of the points of the suspended ball.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, points are set according to the variation type, and the total value of the points corresponding to one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is calculated. comprehensible configuration. During the advance lottery prohibition state, the total points are updated each time a new winning information command is received. It is configured to grasp the variation type included in the ball and determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, whether or not the suspended ball corresponding to the variation type to be determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is suspended from the value of the point, the type of variation type to be determined whether or not to be executed, etc. can be easily identified. In addition, after the announcement lottery prohibition state is canceled, the variation type of all the reserved balls is discriminated one by one, and whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is determined according to the discrimination result. to reduce the processing load.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of the starting prize in the main controller 110, the range of values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. A range parameter corresponding to the range of values is configured to be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . That is, the main controller 110 in the second embodiment is configured to discriminate only the range of acquired values without prefetching. Then, the audio ramp controller 113 discriminates the range of various counter values based on the value of the range parameter notified by the random number range command output from the main controller 110, and prefetches on the audio ramp controller 113 side. It is configured to run. By configuring in this way, when a starting prize is detected, the main controller 110 compares each random number specified in various data tables with the counter value obtained this time, and prefetches the lottery result. Since there is no need to execute processing, and it is sufficient to simply compare the range of values defined in the random number range selection table 202e with the counter value acquired this time, the processing load can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent heavy processing in the main control unit 110, which performs main control related to the game, such as the lottery for the big win and the update of the display mode of the first symbol. can be executed without delay. Further, instead of outputting the counter value (random value) itself obtained based on the starting prize to the sound lamp control device 113, the counter value (random value) is converted into a value range to which the sound lamp control device 113 belongs. , so even if the random number range command is illegally obtained from the outside, the random number value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) that will be a big hit from the illegally obtained random number range command Can be made less predictable. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of deterring fraud. In addition, on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, based on the notified counter value (random value) range, since it is possible to execute the pre-reading process corresponding to the various counters, special symbol fluctuation start processing in the main control device 110 (Refer to FIG. 23). Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 can grasp the prefetch result more accurately.

In the second embodiment, various counter values acquired when a new start winning is detected are converted into range parameters and notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by a random number range command. No need to convert to range parameters. For example, prepare the same number of values that each counter value (random number) can take and the same number of conversion parameters, so that each value that each counter value can take and the value of the conversion parameter have a one-to-one correspondence. It is good also as a structure which sets. Then, when various counter values are obtained based on the starting winning, the various counter values may be converted into conversion parameter values and notified to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to provide various data tables that define the correspondence between conversion parameters and lottery results. With this configuration, the lottery results can be prefetched on the audio lamp control device 113 side under conditions closer to the various lotteries executed on the main controller 110 side, so that prefetching can be executed more accurately. can.

In the second embodiment, the range of values to which the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 belong are specified by the random number range selection table 202e. Although the specified range is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, the type of the counter to be controlled is not limited to this, and may be determined arbitrarily.

In the second embodiment, the range to which the various counter values obtained based on the starting winnings belong is specified and notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a random number range command. It may be configured to notify. For example, as a table to be compared with various counter values at the time of start-up winning, a data table in which random numbers and lottery results are associated with each other is prepared for the number of counter values, and various counter values are prepared based on start-up winning. A configuration may be adopted in which the lottery result corresponding to is specified and output to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command. By configuring in this way, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 side can be reduced. Also, in this case, there is no need to provide a dedicated data table to be referred to for specifying the lottery result of various counter values at the time of start winning, and the data table used for executing the lottery of special symbols at the start of fluctuation is shared. It may be configured to be used in

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of cancellation is calculated, and the calculated logical sum data is obtained. It was configured to discriminate the type of variation included in the held ball based on. Then, based on the determined variation type, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, during the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the type of lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the lottery results based on all the reserved balls, and the lottery with the highest degree of expectation It is possible to store a holding area where a ball corresponding to the result is held. This stored information is updated each time a prefetch result based on a new start winning is notified by a winning information command. That is, by comparing the type of lottery result (variable type) based on the new start winning prize with the type of lottery result with the highest degree of expectation already stored, the degree of expectation indicated by the new lottery result is already If the expected degree of lottery result with the highest degree of expectation among the stored items is higher than the expected degree, the type of the lottery result based on the new winning information and the position of the reserved area where the new winning information is stored are overwritten. It is configured.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice lamp The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 60(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(b)), a high expectation type flag 223n, a The difference is that a position storage area 223p is provided.

The high expectation type flag 223n is a flag indicating the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest degree of expectation among the lottery results (variation type) corresponding to each reserved ball. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, based on the state of the high expectation level type flag 223n, it is determined whether or not the variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is reserved ( See S4432 in FIG. 62). A correspondence relationship between the state of the high expectation degree type flag 223n and the degree of expectation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(b).

FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the state (value) of the high expectation level type flag 223n and the expectation level. As shown in FIG. 60(b), the high expectation level type flag 223n has a configuration in which five types of states from 00H to 04H can be set. As shown in FIG. 60(b), the value "00H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "long deviation" and "short deviation" which are the fluctuation types with the lowest expectation, and "01H ” corresponds to “normal reach out”, which is the variation type with the second lowest (fourth highest) degree of expectation. In addition, the value "02H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "super reach out" which is the third lowest (third highest) fluctuation type with the expectation, and "03H" is the expectation corresponds to "special reach out" which is the second highest (fourth lowest) variation type.

The value "04H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "various wins" (special reach, super reach, normal reach) with the highest degree of expectation. That is, in the third embodiment, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the same expectation is set regardless of the variation type. This is intended to prevent the continuous advance notice effect from being interrupted due to a big win occurring in the middle of the continuous notice effect. In other words, when the variation type of the jackpot is configured to have a difference in the degree of expectation, the start winning corresponding to the jackpot of the variation type with the low degree of expectation occurs first, and then the jackpot of the variation type with the high degree of expectation is generated. When a starting prize is generated, the high-expectation-type flag 223n and the high-expectation-type position storage area 223p, which will be described later, may be updated based on the high-expectation variation type jackpot. In other words, when a plurality of balls corresponding to the jackpot are reserved at the time when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the jackpot reservation based on the start winning detected later in time determines whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. You may be subject to judgment. In this case, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect is executed until the variation display of the big win based on the start winning detected later in time, so that it is detected earlier in time. Even in the variable display of the jackpot based on the additional introduction prize, the notice effect is set. Therefore, since the big win is made after the fluctuation display that starts the fluctuation ahead, there is a possibility that the player may be misunderstood as if the continuous announcement performance was executed to notify the big win. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the variation type corresponding to the big win is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of expectation, and in the state where the reserved ball corresponding to the big win already exists, the start winning corresponding to the new big win is detected. However, the high-expectation-level type flag 223n and the high-expectation-level position storage area 223p, which will be described later, are configured not to be updated based on the variation type corresponding to the new start prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which a big hit occurs in the middle of the continuous notice performance and the continuous notice performance is restarted again after the big win, so it is possible to determine which was the last variable display of the continuous notice performance. can be made to be understood more clearly by the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible presentation.

The high expectation level type flag 223n is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see S4326 in FIG. 61 and S4436 in FIG. 62). Also, each time a winning information command is received (that is, each time a new starting winning is detected), the variation type indicated by the winning information command and the highest expected variation in the hold indicated by the high expectation level type flag 223n If the expectation level of the variation type indicated by the winning information command is higher, the value of this high expectation level type flag 223n is a value corresponding to the expectation level of the variation type newly notified by the winning information command. (see S4324 in FIG. 61). Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect is executed up to the variable display based on the data of the holding area indicated by the high expectation position storage area 223p. (see S4434 in FIG. 62).

Here, although illustration is omitted, in the third embodiment, in accordance with the same expectation level ("04H") for all variation types that will be a big hit, the specified contents of the notice selection table 222b For the variation type that becomes a big hit, it is configured so that a common determination value is referred to regardless of the variation type. That is, for example, in the first embodiment, the determination value (see 222b2 in FIG. 13) used for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed when the variation type based on the new start winning is "super reach win" is In the third embodiment, all the variation types corresponding to the jackpot are used for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

In addition, when the variation type based on the newly detected start winning is the variation type of the big hit, the determination value used for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is not limited to this. It may be configured to use the determination value (222b3 in FIG. 13) used for determination in the case of a normal reach hit in the first embodiment, or a range of determination values not defined in the advance notice selection table 222b in the first embodiment may be used. may be configured. Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 60(a), the description continues. The high-expectation position storage area 223p is located at the position of the reservation area where the variation type with the highest expectation (that is, the variation type of expectation indicated by the value of the high-expectation-type flag 223n) is reserved among the reserved balls. This is a storage area for storing corresponding data. Specifically, if the reservation area in which the ball corresponding to the variation type with the highest degree of expectation is reserved is the first reservation area, "01H" is stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p, In the case of the reserved second area, "02H" is stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p, and in the case of the reserved third area, "03H" is stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p, In the case of the reserved fourth area, "03H" is stored in the high-expectation-probability-position storage area 223p. The high-expectation position storage area 223p is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (that is, when the announcement lottery is prohibited) (Fig. 61, S4436 in FIG. 62). Also, each time a winning information command is received (that is, each time a new start winning is detected), the variation type indicated by the winning information command and the highest expected variation in the pending indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n If the expectation level of the variation type indicated by the winning information command is higher than the type, the value corresponding to the reserved area in which the data corresponding to the winning information newly notified by the winning information command is stored is high. The expected degree position storage area 223p is overwritten (see S4325 in FIG. 61). When the advance notice lottery inhibition state is canceled and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect is executed up to the variable display based on the data of the holding area indicated by the high expectation position storage area 223p. (see S4434 in FIG. 62).

Thus, in the third embodiment, in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest degree of expectation among the reserved balls and the lottery result with the highest degree of expectation are stored. The reserved area that is currently in use can be grasped by the value of the high-expectation-type flag 223n and the data stored in the high-expectation-position storage area 223p. As a result, in the judgment of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect executed when the notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the continuous notice effect is simply determined by the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 because it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as determining the variation type of all the ball holdings one by one. Furthermore, it is possible to easily identify the reservation area in which data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) with the highest degree of expectation is stored based on the data stored in the high degree of expectation position storage area 223p. , the processing for specifying the range of the ball on hold for executing the continuous announcement effect can be realized by simpler control. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the processing load during the period from the release of the advance notice lottery prohibition state to the setting of the continuous advance notice effect.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. First, the winning information command process 3 (S4231) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) is a process executed in place of the winning information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is the winning information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Similar to , this is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect.

In the processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, each processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34) The same processing is performed. In addition, in the winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4304: Yes), the high expectation type flag 223n (S4321), and the expectation level indicated by the read high expectation level type flag 223n is compared with the expectation level of the variation type indicated by the received winning information command (S4322). Then, it is determined whether the expectation level corresponding to the variation type notified by the winning information command newly received this time is the high expectation level (S4323), and the newly notified variation type is the high expectation level. If it is determined (S4323: Yes), the high expectation level type flag 223n is updated to a value corresponding to the expectation level of the variation type notified by the winning information command this time (see FIG. 60(b)). (S4324).

After the processing of S4324, the value corresponding to the type of reservation area (one of the first to fourth reservation areas) storing the data notified by the winning information command this time is overwritten in the high-expectation position storage area 223p. (Storage) (S4325), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4323, if it is determined that the degree of expectation of the newly notified variation type is less than or equal to the degree of expectation indicated by the high degree of expectation type flag 223n (S4323: No), the processing of S4324 and S4325 is performed. Skip and end this process.

In addition, in the winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, after the process of S4310 is completed (that is, after setting the continuous announcement effect), the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation Both the degree position storage areas 223p are reset to initial values (S4326), and the process proceeds to S4311.

By executing this winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61), every time winning information based on a new starting winning prize is received in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, all of the winning balls including the new reserved balls based on the winning information are It is possible to rediscriminate the type (type) of the lottery result (fluctuation type) with the highest degree of expectation among the reserved balls and the stored reserved area. Therefore, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest degree of expectation among the reserved balls, and the stored reservation area, the high expectation type flag 223n and the data in the high-expectation-probability-position storage area 223p. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load during the period from the cancellation of the advance notice lottery prohibition state to the completion of the setting of the continuous advance notice effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect setting process can be executed more preferably.

Next, the details of the stop command process 3 (S4232) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop command process 3 (S4232) in the third embodiment is a process executed instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), it is determined whether or not the state of prohibition of advance notice lottery is canceled, and if it is the timing of cancellation of the state of prohibition of advance notice lottery, execution of continuous notice effect is possible based on the lottery results of all reserved balls. This is a process for making a determination.

Of the stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, each process of S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 is different from the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 are executed. In addition, in the stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4404 ends, the high expectation level type flag 223n is read (S4431), and the value of the read high expectation level type flag 223n ( state) is "00H" (S4432). In other words, it is determined whether or not the pending ball is included in the pending ball to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed.

In the process of S4432, if the value of the high expectation level type flag 223n is "00H" (S4432: Yes), the variation type with the highest level of expectation in the hold is "long out" or "short out", Since it means that the reservation does not include the reserved balls to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice performance is to be executed, this processing is terminated as it is without executing the determination of whether or not the continuous notice performance is to be executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4432, if it is determined that the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is not "00H" (S4432: No), then the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is " 02H" or more (S4433), and if it is determined to be "01H" (S4433: No), the hold ball corresponding to the variation type with the highest degree of expectation is stored in the first hold area. Since it means that the advance notice effect cannot be executed over a plurality of variable displays, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4433, if it is determined that the data stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p is equal to or greater than "02H" (S4433: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Since it means that the variation type is included in the suspension and the variation type is suspended after the second suspension area, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed. Specifically, the notice selection table 222b is read (S4409), and the continuous notice effect is executed based on the read notice selection table 222b and the variation type corresponding to the value (state) of the high expectation level type flag 223n. The decision (lottery) is made as to whether or not it is possible (S4434), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In addition, in the stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4412 ends, the value stored in the high-expectation-probability position storage area 223p is set as the value of the number-of-notices counter 223i (S4435 ), the high-expectation type flag 223n and the high-expectation location storage area 223p are both reset to the initial value "00H" (S4436), and the process proceeds to S4415.

By executing this stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62), when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. Acceptability can be easily determined. Further, when execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, based on the data stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p, it is possible to easily specify the range of the reservation area to be set for the continuous announcement effect. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load from the release of the advance notice lottery prohibition state to the end of the setting of the continuous advance notice effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, details of the advance notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment will be described. The notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and the notice effect setting process ( 37), it is a process for determining whether or not the continuous notice effect is set for the variable display to be started based on the current change pattern command, and setting the notice effect if it is set.

In each process of S4601 to S4607 of the notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, each process of S4601 to S4607 in the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the advance notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, when the processing of S4604 or S4607 is completed (that is, in the case of the fluctuation start timing during the advance notice lottery prohibited state), the high It is determined whether the state (value) of the expectation level type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621). It is updated by subtraction (S4622), and this processing ends. As a result, the start of a new fluctuation display is set, and as the data of each holding area is shifted, the position (holding area) where the holding ball corresponding to the most expected fluctuation type is stored The data shown (data in the high-expectation-probability location storage area 223p) can be updated. On the other hand, in the process of S4621, if it is determined that the state of the high-expectation level type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621: Yes), the process of S4622 is skipped and the process ends. If the state of the high-expectation level flag 223n is "00H", it means that the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) has never been executed in the current advance lottery prohibition state, or the winning information command processing 3 (Refer to FIG. 61) S4323 processing means that the variation type corresponding to the new prize information has never been determined to be the high expectation, so the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p is still the initial value of "00H".

By executing this advance notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63), every time the start of a new variable display is set in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the data in the high expectation position storage area 223p is stored as the actual winning information. It can be updated by linking to the data in the area 223a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, during the advance notice lottery prohibited state, among the lottery results based on all the reserved balls, the type of lottery result (variation type) with the highest degree of expectation, and its The holding area in which the ball corresponding to the lottery result with high expectation is held can be grasped by the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. there is Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest degree of expectation among the reserved balls, and the stored reservation area, the high expectation type The determination is made based on the value (state) of the flag 223n and the data in the high-expectation-probability-position storage area 223p.

By configuring in this way, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation level type flag 223n. can. That is, compared with the case of determining the variation type of each reserved ball one by one from all the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a and specifying the variation type with the highest degree of expectation, the processing is simpler. , it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled can be reduced. Further, when execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, based on the data stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p, it is possible to easily specify the range of the reservation area to be set for the continuous announcement effect. can. That is, the process of searching for the reservation area storing the data corresponding to the variation type for which it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is omitted, and the data stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p is simply stored. Since it can be replaced by a simple process of reading out, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the range of the pending ball to be the target of the continuous announcement effect.

In the third embodiment, when the result of the lottery corresponding to the big win is notified by the winning information command, and at the time when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the reserved balls corresponding to the big win are included in the lottery. When the result is reserved, whether or not the continuous advance notice performance can be executed is determined by the same determination value regardless of the variation type corresponding to the big win, but it is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined according to the variation type is varied according to the variation type.

In the third embodiment, based on two types of information, the value of the high-expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p, continuous Although it is configured to determine whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed, it is not limited to this. Only one of them may be provided in the RAM 223, and it may be determined together with the data stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the prize information notified by the prize information command is stored in the empty area of the prize information storage area 223a, but the prize information storage area 223a may be deleted. Normally, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based only on the winning information notified by the winning information command. This is because, based only on the data stored in the area 223p, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is cancelled. By deleting the prize winning information storage area 223a, the capacity of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, by setting the announcement lottery prohibition state, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the continuous announcement effect from being repeatedly determined. . Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of cancellation is calculated, and the continuous advance notice performance is executed based on the calculated logical sum. It was configured to determine whether or not it was possible. That is, based on the logical sum data, whether or not the suspended ball of the variation type to be judged whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is included in the suspended ball, and the variation with the highest degree of expectation among the current suspended balls It is configured to determine what the type is. Then, if the variation type that is the target for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is included, the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest degree of expectation is used to determine whether the continuous notice effect can be executed ( lottery).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, not only when it is decided to execute continuous advance notice effects, but also when a big win is made, the notice lottery prohibition state is set. Then, even at the end of the jackpot, the prohibition state of the advance notice lottery is canceled, and calculation of the logical sum data and determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed are executed. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed in consideration of the variation type of all the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the big hit, so even if the reserved balls with a higher degree of expectation are reserved In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, immediately after the end of the jackpot, even though the continuous notice effect is set for the ball with low expectation, the continuous notice effect is not set for the ball with high expectation, and the continuous notice effect It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a ball with a high expectation is digested in the middle and a ball with a low expectation is digested in the final variable display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous advance notice effect.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. is. Various electrical configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 64, the change over time of the lottery (judgment) state of the continuous advance notice effect after winning the jackpot in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, when the big win is won and the start timing of the big win (the start timing of the opening period) comes, the advanced lottery prohibition state is set. As a result, during the jackpot, even if the starting prize is detected, the decision (lottery) as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is not executed. The example of FIG. 64 shows the case where two start winnings (winning a and winning b) are detected during the jackpot. Since the lottery prohibition state is set, the determination as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the advance lottery prohibition state continues even during the ending period of the jackpot, and the advance lottery prohibition state is canceled when the ending period ends (that is, when the jackpot ends). be. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the content (variation type) of the suspended ball (winning a and winning b) held during the jackpot and the held ball already held when the jackpot started Based on this, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. That is, similarly to the case where the advance notice lottery prohibition state in the first embodiment described above is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in each reserved area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated, and the highest expectation is obtained. Identify the variation type. Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed with the lottery probability (determination ratio) corresponding to the variation type with the high degree of expectation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect by considering the variation type of all the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot, so that the reserved balls with higher expectations can be determined. It is possible to suppress the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the ball with a low degree of expectation even though it is reserved. If, during the execution of the jackpot, until the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided as in the normal time, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed each time the start winning prize is detected, the variation type with a low degree of expectation After determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the starting winning, there is a possibility of detecting the highly expected variable type starting winning. In this case, the continuous notice performance that starts from the fluctuation immediately after the end of the big win continues until the fluctuation type with low expectation, and the highly expected fluctuation display is executed immediately after the end of the continuous notice performance. There is a possibility that the degree of reliability of the continuous advance notice effect of the player may be lowered. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, since it is configured to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state during the big win, even if the continuous notice effect is set for the holding ball with low expectation immediately after the end of the big win Regardless, the situation where the continuous notice effect is not set for the ball with high expectation, and the ball with high expectation is digested in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the expectation is low at the last fluctuation display of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the retained ball is digested. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous advance notice effect.

Although not shown in the figure, if the continuous notice effect has already been set at the time of the start timing of the jackpot, the setting of the continuous notice effect will be cleared once when setting the notice lottery prohibition state. It is configured. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the end of the big win while the setting of the continuous notice performance before the start of the big win remains, so that the balls held at the time of winning the big win and during the big win can be suppressed more surely. Taking into account all the variation types of the increased reserved balls, it is possible to suitably determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed after the big win.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, at the timing of the start of the jackpot, the setting of the continuous notice effect that has already been set before the start of the jackpot is cleared. The timing of clearing is not limited to this, and can be determined arbitrarily. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting of the continuous announcement effect is cleared based on the detection of the first starting winning in the jackpot. By constructing in this way, for example, when the starting prize is not detected even once during the big win, the setting of the continuous notice performance before the start of the big win can be diverted as it is as the setting after the big win. In other words, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to prevent the wasteful process of judging whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed again for the completely same reserved ball as before the start of the big win. The processing load of the lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. FIG. First, the command determination process 4 (S4131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This command determination process 4 (S4131) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above, and is similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Second, it is a process for performing control according to commands received from the main controller 110 .

In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 corresponds to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

In addition, in the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the state command is received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the game state according to the game state indicated by the state command A status command process is executed to update the data in the storage area 223g (S4231), and this process ends. Details of this state command processing (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the winning information command process in the first embodiment ( 34), the winning information command process 4 is executed (S4232), and this process ends. The details of this winning information command process 4 (S4232) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command among the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4233). ), when it is determined that an opening command has been received (S4233: Yes), first, the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4234). As a result, it is possible to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state at the time when the opening period of the jackpot is started.

When the process of S4234 is finished, next, the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is reset to 0, and the notice type flag 223k is reset to the initial value "00H", thereby resetting the continuous notice effect setting. (S4235), sets an opening command for display (S4236), and terminates this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4233 that the opening command has not been received (S4233: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the stop command has been received in the process of S4213 (S4213: Yes), instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) , the release determination process is executed (S4237), and the process proceeds to S4215. This cancellation determination process (S4237) determines whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, and if the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed according to the variation type of each reserved ball. This is a process for determining The details of this cancellation determination process (S4237) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-described state command processing (S4231) will be described. This state command process (S4231) is, as described above, a process for updating the data in the game state storage area 223g according to the game state indicated by the state command.

In this state command processing (see FIG. 66), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4801). , It is determined whether or not it is a state command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the state command set by the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . As described above, the lower 2 bits of the status command composed of 1-byte data are the data indicating the game status. That is, the least significant bit is a bit that indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the second lower bit is a bit that indicates whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variable state. In the fourth embodiment, if a predetermined bit other than the lower two bits (for example, the most significant bit) is on, it indicates that it is a state command output at the end of the jackpot, and if it is off, the jackpot Indicates that the status command was output at a time other than termination. That is, in the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the data of the lower two bits of the state command are set according to the gaming state after the jackpot, and a predetermined bit (eg, most significant bit) is set to ON. As a result, in the process of S4802, it is possible to easily determine whether the state command is output at the end of the jackpot, simply by determining whether a predetermined bit (for example, the most significant bit) is ON.

In the processing of S4802, if it is determined that the state command is output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it means that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. ), the above-described cancellation determination process is executed (S4804), and this process ends. By setting the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4802, in the release time determination process (S4804), the held ball held at the start of the big win and the held ball newly acquired during the execution of the big win Based on the variation type of the ball, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is finished, and when the jackpot is finished, the cancellation determination process ( (See FIG. 68) to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. As a result, the description of the control program can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed in a separate process according to the release trigger of the advance notice lottery prohibition state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the workload of the developer at the time of development.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4802, if it is determined that the state command received from the main control device 110 is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: No), each processing of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and left as it is. End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, details of the winning information command process 4 (S4232) will be described. This winning information command process 4 (S4232) is, as described above, a process that is executed in place of the winning information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment.

Of the winning information command process 4 (S4232) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S4301 to S4311 is the same as each process of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

In addition, in the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S4301 is completed, there is a hold corresponding to the jackpot before the start winning that triggered the output of the winning information command this time. It is determined whether or not the ball has already been reserved (S4331). More specifically, the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and the data of each reservation area are read, and at least one data is a variation type corresponding to the jackpot (per special reach, per super reach, or per normal reach) ). That is, the OR of all reserved areas other than the reserved area storing the data based on the winning information command of this time is calculated, and it is determined whether or not at least one bit of the high-order 3 bits is ON.

In the processing of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot has already been reserved (one of the higher 3 bits of the logical sum is ON) (S4331: Yes), the reservation based on this start winning Even if you set a continuous notice effect that extends to the ball, the continuous notice effect will be reset due to a big hit on the way, so the continuous notice effect will be incomplete (for example, a continuous notice effect that spans three fluctuations). You should have set a notice effect, but the first change will be a big hit, etc.). Therefore, in this case, the present processing is terminated as it is without determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S4331, if it is determined that the ball corresponding to the big hit is not reserved (S4331: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the variation type indicated by the winning information command this time. Each process of S4302 to S4311 for the purpose is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, details of the above-described cancellation determination process (S4237, S4804) will be described. This cancellation determination process (S4237, S4804) is a process for determining whether or not continuous announcement effects can be executed and the execution range based on the variation type of each reserved ball when the announcement lottery prohibition state is canceled. . That is, this processing corresponds to the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. In addition, in the first embodiment, the timing at which the advance notice lottery prohibition state can be canceled was only the timing at which the stop command was received. The prohibition state is canceled. Therefore, the name of the process has been changed to "determination process at the time of cancellation".

In the processes of S4401 to S4415 of the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S4401 to S4415 of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are the same. Processing is performed. In addition, in the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4403 is completed, then the variation display being executed or the variation display to be executed next is the variation for notifying the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is a display (S4441). More specifically, the data of the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and the data of the first reservation area are read, and it is determined which area stores the data corresponding to the variation type of the jackpot. In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the variation type of the jackpot is stored (S4441: Yes), even if the continuous announcement effect is set, the announcement effect continues over a plurality of variable displays. It means that a big hit will occur before is executed, and the setting of the continuous announcement effect will be reset. Therefore, in this case, the process is terminated without determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4441, when it is determined that neither the variable display being executed nor the variable display to be executed next is a big hit (S4441: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed and the execution range. The processing of S4404 to S4415 is executed to complete the processing.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state not only when execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, but also when a big win occurs. Then, even at the end of the jackpot, the prohibition state of the advance notice lottery is canceled, and calculation of the logical sum data and determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed are executed. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed in consideration of the variation type of all the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the big hit, so even if the reserved balls with a higher degree of expectation are reserved In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, immediately after the end of the jackpot, even though the continuous notice effect is set for the ball with low expectation, the continuous notice effect is not set for the ball with high expectation, and the continuous notice effect It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a ball with a high expectation is digested in the middle and a ball with a low expectation is digested in the final variable display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous advance notice effect.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is finished, and when the jackpot ends, completely the same processing is performed. See) is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed by executing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the description of the control program compared to the case of determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in a separate process according to the release trigger of the announcement lottery prohibition state. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the workload of the developer during development.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled at the end timing of the jackpot, and the reserved ball already reserved at the start of the jackpot and the start winning newly detected during the jackpot are reserved. From the variation type of each ball, it was configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect after the end of the jackpot, but the timing of canceling the notice lottery prohibition state and the timing of determining whether the continuous notice effect can be executed It is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the starting prize during the jackpot and determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice performance by canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state at the time when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum. When the number of pending balls reaches the maximum, it is impossible for the number of pending balls to increase after that (that is, the type of fluctuation with the highest degree of expectation does not change until the end of the jackpot), so a continuous notice effect is performed at the end of the jackpot. This is because it is possible to obtain the same result as determination of whether or not execution of is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of troubles such as delay in the timing of starting the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 after the end of the big win.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based on the end of the big win and the case where the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based on the end of the continuous notice effect are the same. Although the configuration is such that the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68), which is the process, is executed, the same process does not necessarily have to be executed. A separate process may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the processing different at the end of the big win and at the end of the continuous advance notice performance, so that the conditions for executing the continuous notice performance can be changed. As a result, for example, after the end of the big win, it is possible to realize a special control such as permitting the execution of the continuous announcement effect only when the win is finally achieved. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention to the release condition of the advance lottery prohibition state, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set during the big win, and the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled at the end timing of the big win to determine whether or not the continuous notice performance can be executed.

On the other hand, in this modified example, at a predetermined timing (at the start of the ending period) during the jackpot, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is cancelled, and it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Then, in the ending effect of the big win, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect will start after the end of the big win. As a result, when the ending effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the continuous notice is started before the variable display of the third pattern is started in the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the performance.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed. , and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 69(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 69(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69A, the ROM 222 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment described above (the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12A)). ) in that an ending selection table 222h is added. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, so details thereof will be omitted.

The ending selection table 222h is a data table referred to for determining the mode of the ending effect when the ending period for the jackpot is started. As described above, in this modified example, the degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect will be executed after the end of the big win is suggested by the mode of the ending effect. In this modification, a normal mode (a mode with a low degree of expectation that a continuous notice effect is executed) ) or the ending effect of a special mode (a mode in which the degree of expectation for execution of the continuous advance notice effect is high) is determined from the ending selection table 222h (see S4910 in FIG. 72).

Details of the ending selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the ending selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 70, the ending effect selection table 222h contains the range of the value (random number) of the effect lottery counter 223f that determines the normal ending with a low degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect is executed, and the continuous notice effect. A range of random numbers (counter values) for determining a highly anticipated advance notice suggesting ending to be executed is defined in association with whether or not continuous advance notice effects can be executed and for each determination result of the advance notice type. Although illustration is omitted, in the normal ending, the background color during the ending effect is set to blue, while in the advance notice suggestion ending, the background color is set to red. With this configuration, the player can easily identify whether the ending is a normal ending or a suggested ending just by checking the color of the background. Therefore, at the start of the ending period of the jackpot, the player can play the game expecting that the background will turn red.

As shown in FIG. 70, "0 to 49" is defined as a range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to normal endings in association with "notice effect A", which corresponds to the suggested endings. "50 to 99" are associated and defined as the range of random numbers (counter values) (see 222h1 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when "notice effect A" is determined in the lottery for whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect executed during the big win, the notice suggestion ending as the jackpot ending effect at a rate of 50% (50/100). is set.

In addition, "0 to 24" is defined in association with "notice effect B" as the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to normal endings, and random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the suggested endings are defined. ) is associated with “25 to 99” (see 222h2 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when "notice effect B" is determined in the lottery for whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect executed during the big win, the advance notice suggested ending as the jackpot ending effect at a rate of 75% (75/100). is set. "0 to 9" is defined in association with "notice effect C" as the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to normal endings, and the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the suggested endings is defined. "10 to 99" is associated and defined as the range (see 222h3 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when "notice effect C" is determined in the lottery for whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect executed during the big win, the notice suggestion ending as the jackpot ending effect at a ratio of 90% (90/100). is set.

On the other hand, as a range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the case where the continuous announcement effect is not executed after the big win (when the continuous announcement effect is not executed), "0 to 94" is associated and defined, and the announcement suggestion ending. "95 to 99" is associated and defined as the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to (see 222h4 in FIG. 70). For this reason, in the lottery for whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect executed during the big win, when non-execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, only 5% of the ratio (5/100) is used as the ending effect of the jackpot. No advance notice ending is set.

Thus, in this modification, when the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, the ratio of setting the advance notice suggested ending as the ending effect is set extremely low (at a rate of 5%), so that the advance notice suggested ending is set. At the time when it is executed, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, in this modification, it is configured such that the determination rate of the advance notice suggesting ending increases as the advance notice type with a higher degree of expectation for a big win is determined. That is, in the case of the "notice effect A" with a relatively low degree of expectation for the big win, the advance notice suggested ending is determined at a rate of 50%, and the "notice effect B" with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the "notice effect A". In the case of , the advance-notification ending is determined at a rate of 75%, and in the case of the "notice effect C" with the highest expectation for the big win, the advance-notice-suggested ending is determined at a rate of 90%. By configuring in this way, the player can expect that the "notice effect C" has been determined when the foreknowledge suggesting ending is executed. That is, when the advance-suggestion ending is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be heightened, so that the game can be played while paying more attention to the aspect of the ending effect.

In this modified example, the background color during the execution of the ending effect is different between the normal ending and the advance notice ending, but this is only an example. Any production mode can be used as long as it can be distinguished from the ending. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending production may be different between the normal ending and the ending suggesting advance notice (for example, in the normal ending, the characters "See you later!" In the ending, the character "chance!" etc.). Further, the difference between the normal ending and the advance notice ending is not limited to the display mode of the third pattern display device 81. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the normal ending and the advance notice suggesting ending have different effects by changing the light emission colors and light emission patterns of the parts 29 to 33 .

In addition, in this modified example, only two types of ending effects, the normal ending and the advance notice suggesting ending, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is provided in which four types of ending performance modes are provided, each of which has a high rate of selection when the advance notice performance A is executed after the big win, and a high rate of selection when the notice performance B is executed. , a type with a high rate of selection when the advance notice effect C is executed, and a type with a high rate of selection when the continuous advance notice effect is not executed may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect will be executed, but also the effect type of the advance notice effect that is highly likely to be executed, during the ending period from the aspect of the ending effect. , the game can be played while paying attention to the aspect of the ending effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG.69(b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM223 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the RAM 223 in this modified example has the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described fourth embodiment (same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(b))). , in that a determination non-execution flag 223q is added. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described fourth embodiment, so details thereof will be omitted.

The determination non-execution flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not it has been determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect can be performed at the start of the ending period. If the determination non-execution flag 223q is ON, it indicates that execution of the continuous advance notice performance has not been executed at the start of the ending period, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the execution permission of the continuous notice performance has already been determined. .

Here, in this modified example, only when the number of reserved balls has accumulated to the upper limit value (4) at the start of the ending period, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in a state where the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit, then a new starting prize is detected during the execution of the ending effect, and the change type of the new starting prize is , If the expectation level is higher than the variation type of each reserved ball for which the continuous announcement effect has already been set, a situation will occur in which the highly expected variable display is executed immediately after the continuous announcement effect ends. .

Therefore, in this modification, only when the number of pending balls has accumulated to the upper limit at the start of the ending period and there is no possibility that the status of the pending balls will change during the ending period, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. It is configured to Then, when it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement performance can be executed at the start of the ending period, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement performance can be executed at the end of the big win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice performance in consideration of the variation types of all the reserved balls held at the end of the big win, so that the continuous notice performance is preferably executed. be able to.

The determination non-execution flag 223q is set to ON when it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed at the start of the ending period (see S4908 in FIG. 73), and determines whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed at the end of the jackpot. is set to off (see S4812 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. First, the details of command determination processing 5 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed instead of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, and is similar to the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for performing control according to a command received from main controller 110 .

In command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, each of the processes of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 performs the command determination in the fourth embodiment. The same processes as S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 of process 4 (see FIG. 65) are executed.

In addition, in command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4209 that a state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the state command processing in the fourth embodiment (See FIG. 66), status command processing 5 is executed (S4241), and this processing ends. The details of this state command process 5 (S4241) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4233 that the opening command is not included in the command received from the main controller 110 ( S4233: No), it is determined whether there is an ending command in the commands received from main controller 110 (S4242). Then, in the processing of S4242, if it is determined that the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S4242: Yes), the ending command processing for selecting the aspect of the ending effect is executed (S4243), End the process. The details of this ending command process (S4243) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, details of the state command processing 5 (S4241) described above will be described. This state command processing 5 (S4241) is similar to the state command processing (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment, in accordance with the game state indicated by the state command received from the main controller 110, the data in the game state storage area 223g. This is a process for updating the

In the state command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the processing in S4801 to S4804 corresponds to the processing in S4801 to S4804 in the state command processing in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 66). The same processing as is performed.

In addition, in the state command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the current state command is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the judgment non-execution flag 223q is ON (S4811), and if the judgment non-execution flag 223q is ON (S4811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed at the start of the ending period. Since it indicates that it has not been executed, after setting the determination non-execution flag 223q to OFF (S4812), each processing of S4803 and S4804 for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed, and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, in the processing of S4811, if it is determined that the determination non-execution flag 223q is off (S4811: No), the number of pending balls reached the upper limit at the start of the ending period, so the execution of the continuous notice effect is possible. has already been determined, the processes of S4812, S4803, and S4804 are skipped, and this process ends.

By executing this state command process 5 (see FIG. 72), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect at the end of the jackpot, even if it has not been determined at the start of the ending period. Therefore, in each big win, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice performance according to the variation type of the held balls held at the start of the big win and the held balls increased during the big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, details of the ending command processing (S4243) described above will be described. This ending command process is, as described above, a process for selecting the aspect of the ending effect.

In this ending command process (see FIG. 73), first, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4901), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 4 (S4902). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls has reached the upper limit. In the processing of S4902, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is 4 (S4902: Yes), the possibility that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the expected variation type will increase during the ending period. Since there is no, each processing of S4903, S4904 for executing the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is executed. That is, the advance notice prohibition cancellation flag 223j is set to ON (S4903), the cancellation determination process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905. Note that this cancellation determination process is exactly the same as the cancellation determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S4905, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the cancellation determination process (S4904), and a value corresponding to the number of consecutive announcement effects is set to the announcement frequency counter 223i. In the processing of S4905, if it is determined that the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4905: Yes), the effect type of the continuous notice effect determined this time is specified from the state of the notice type flag 223k. Then (S4906), in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to the effect type specified in the process of S4906 is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f (S4907). ).

Next, from the comparison result of the process of S4907, the ending type (either normal ending or advance notice suggested ending) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f is determined (S4910), and the display control device 114 is notified of the determined ending type. An ending command for display is set (S4911), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4902, if it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 4 (S4902: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. , During the ending period, there is a possibility of detecting the start winning corresponding to the variation type with the higher expectation (There is a possibility that it will not be possible to determine whether or not it is possible), so the unexecuted determination flag 223q is set to ON (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. Also, in the processing of S4905, even if it is determined that the value of the number of notice counter 223i is 0 (that is, the execution of the continuous notice effect has not been determined) (S4905: No), the processing proceeds to S4909. .

In the process of S4909, in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), the range of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to non-execution of the continuous advance notice effect (see 222h4 in FIG. 70) and the counter value of the effect lottery counter 223f are determined. (S4909), the process proceeds to S4910, and the ending type is determined and the ending command for display is set in the same manner as when execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined.

By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 73), it is possible to select the mode of the ending effect at a rate corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. is executed or not, and the degree of expectation according to the type of notice can be indicated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, at a predetermined timing (at the start of the ending period) during the jackpot, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. and Then, depending on the aspect of the ending effect of the big win, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect will start after the end of the big win. As a result, when the ending effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the continuous notice is started before the variable display of the third pattern is started in the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the performance.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the background color during execution of the ending effect is made different between the normal ending and the advance notice suggesting ending. , and the advance notice suggesting ending can be set in an arbitrary manner within a range in which they can be distinguished from each other. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending production may be different between the normal ending and the ending suggesting advance notice (for example, in the normal ending, the characters "See you later!" In the ending, the character "chance!" etc.). Further, the difference between the normal ending and the advance notice ending is not limited to the display mode of the third pattern display device 81. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the normal ending and the advance notice suggesting ending have different effects by changing the light emission colors and light emission patterns of the parts 29 to 33 .

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, only two types of ending effects, the normal ending and the advance-notification ending, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is provided in which four types of ending performance modes are provided, each of which has a high rate of selection when the advance notice performance A is executed after the big win, and a high rate of selection when the notice performance B is executed. , a type with a high rate of selection when the advance notice effect C is executed, and a type with a high rate of selection when the continuous advance notice effect is not executed may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect will be executed, but also the effect type of the advance notice effect that is highly likely to be executed, during the ending period from the aspect of the ending effect. , the game can be played while paying attention to the aspect of the ending effect. Instead of or in addition to these, the expectation that the jackpot is included in the held balls that were held at the end of the jackpot and the held balls that are newly detected during the jackpot based on the starting winnings is added to the ending effect. It is good also as a structure suggested by an aspect. Also, in this case, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation, a configuration may be provided in which an ending effect is selected only when a big win is included. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the aspect of the ending effect.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the number of pending balls has reached the upper limit (4) at the start timing of the ending period, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. However, the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state and the judgment timing of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed are not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the starting prize during the jackpot, and determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect even if the timing for starting the ending period has not come when the number of pending balls reaches the maximum. By configuring in this way, it is only necessary to execute the process of selecting the mode of the ending effect at the start timing of the ending period, and the timing of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed can be made different. Therefore, since the processing load of the sound ramp control device 113 at the start timing of the ending period can be reduced, the selection of the mode of the ending effect is delayed, the execution of the ending effect is delayed, or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is delayed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the inability to normally select the mode corresponding to the decision result of whether or not it is possible.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 (arrangement of nails, arrangement of windmills, etc.) is substantially symmetrical. Game balls are shot with a game ball shot toward the road (right-handed game ball) and a game ball shot toward the channel provided on the left side (left-handed game ball). It is configured such that the period from when it is played until it reaches the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 is substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the game ball (right-handed game ball) shot toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 is on the left side. The period until reaching the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 is longer than the game ball (left-handed game ball) shot toward the flow path provided in the . In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is more likely to reach the variable display unit 80 than the game ball. It is configured such that a game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side has a higher percentage of entering the specific winning hole 65a.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 74, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2). On the right side of 80, a detour accessory 700 into which a play ball can enter is provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, but this detour accessory 700 lengthens the time until the right-handed game ball (shot to the right side of the game board 13) reaches the specific winning hole 65a. is established for In other words, the detour accessory 700 is longer until the game ball fired by right hitting reaches the specific winning port 65a than the period until the game ball fired by left hitting reaches the specific winning port 65a. The falling time of the game ball hit to the right can be lengthened so that the time of . In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 to 2 seconds, whereas the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. is set to be 7 to 8 seconds.

Here, with reference to FIG. 75, details of the detour accessory 700 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 75, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at its upper portion. A game ball shot to the right can enter the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 . In addition, an opening 720 is provided at the bottom of the detour accessory 700 for discharging the game ball flowing down inside the detour accessory 700 to the outside of the detour accessory 700 . Furthermore, in order to prevent the ball that has progressed inside from being discharged to the outside without going through the opening 720, the detour accessory 700 is provided with a peripheral edge 730 that extends in the front, back, and left and right directions as viewed from the front. are surrounded on four sides. Since the peripheral portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily see how the ball flows down.

In addition, since the plane on the back side in the front view of the peripheral edge portion 730 can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60 , a gap is generated between the peripheral edge portion 730 and the base plate 60 . It is possible to suppress the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, of the peripheral edge portion 730, the plane on the front side of the front view and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without any gap when the front frame 14 is closed. By creating a gap between and, it is possible to suppress the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, inside the detour accessory 700, a plurality of flow paths (guiding channels 740 to 790) sloping downwards of the detour accessory 700 are provided. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the spheres come into contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side when viewed from the front and the inner wall on the front side when viewed from the front). distance between ). That is, it is configured to prevent the sphere from passing through gaps generated between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and the guide channels 740 to 790 .

As shown in FIG. 75, the guiding channels 740, 760, 780 are inclined downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. Further, the guide channels 750, 770, 790 are inclined downward from the upper left direction in front view to the lower right direction. Guide channels 740 , 750 , 760 , 770 , 780 , and 790 are arranged in order from above the detour accessory 700 . In other words, the flow paths inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view and the flow paths inclined in the direction downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view are provided alternately.

A game ball that enters the opening 710 first falls into the guide channel 740 and flows down along the slope formed by the guide channel 740 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. When the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740 , the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750 . Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guide channel 750 in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. When the game ball that has flowed down reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the game ball falls into the guide channel 760, and along the slope formed by the guide channel 760, it flows down in the lower left direction in front view.

After that, the game ball alternately repeats the action of flowing down along the channel and the action of falling into the lower channel. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720 . As a result, the ball entering the detouring accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 720 . Since the direction in which the game ball flows changes every time the flow path through which the game ball flows changes (that is, changes from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction), the game ball changes every time the flow path changes. You can reduce the momentum (flowing speed) of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game ball entering the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720 . As a result, compared to shooting the game ball to the left side of the game board 13, when the ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is ejected from the lower part of the game board 13 (first ball entrance 64 or variable winning). The time to reach the area where the device 65 is arranged can be lengthened (7 seconds or more).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the guide channels 740 to 790 are supported by channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. is configured to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation operation is performed by turning the rotation stop members 742a to 792a provided on the lower sides of the guide flow paths 740 to 790, or the lower surfaces of the guide flow paths 740 to 790 with respect to the rotation stop members 742b to 792b. Stop by contact. This rotation operation will be described by taking the guiding channel 740 as an example.

As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable around the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotating motion is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guide channel 740 . Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, causing the upper half of the guide channel 740 to move downward. A force is generated in the direction to rotate it. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotating motion is stopped when the lower surface of the guiding channel 740 comes into contact with the rotating stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating excessively in the clockwise direction and the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming reversed.

Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral edge portion 730, respectively. That is, it is configured so that the position is not displaced due to the impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts. The other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and rotation stop members 752b to 792b also have the same structure as the rotation stop member 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide channel 740, so the lower half of the guide channel 740 is rotated downward. A directional force is generated. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise around the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotating motion is stopped when the lower surface of the guiding channel 740 comes into contact with the rotating stop member 742a. The rotation stopping member 742a can prevent the guiding passage 740 from rotating too much in the counterclockwise direction. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming too large and the impetus of the game ball to be reduced. Therefore, the game ball fired by hitting to the right can surely flow down to the lower part of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. . In addition, when the game ball flows down with the inclination of each guide channel 740 to 790 at its maximum, each guide channel is set so that it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 640 A path length of 740-790 and a maximum tilt angle are set. Since it is rare for the game ball to flow down while all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintain the maximum inclination angle, the time for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 640 is surely set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

In this way, by configuring the inclination of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the game ball, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be varied. be able to. Therefore, the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied. Also, in the above description, the case where one ball progresses on the guide channel 740 has been described, but a state may occur in which a plurality of balls progress on the same guide channel during actual games. In this case, it is possible to make the turning motion of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 even more irregular, so that the time required for the game ball to finish passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, each guide channel 740 to 790 is processed so that the left and right corners of the lower surface are rounded compared to the left and right corners of the upper surface. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the corners of the lower surface and the inner wall portion of the peripheral portion 730 to come into contact when each of the guide channels 740 to 790 rotates. Therefore, since the guide channels 740 to 790 can be arranged at positions closer to the peripheral edge 730, gaps are formed between the guide channels 740 to 790 and the peripheral edge 730, and game balls are formed in the gaps. can be suppressed from being caught or a game ball passing through the gap. Each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is constructed so as to return to the largest inclination due to its own weight when the game ball is not flowing down. For example, in a state where the ball does not flow down the guide channel 740 , the self weight of the guide channel 740 causes the guide channel 740 to rotate counterclockwise in front view with the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. This rotating operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide channel contacts the rotation stopping member 742a, and stops when it contacts the rotation stopping member 742a. Similarly, the guidance channels 750-790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with the respective rotation stop members 752a-792a due to their own weight when the game ball is not flowing down. As a result, it is determined whether the game ball flows down while the guide channels 750 to 790 are rotating, or the game ball flows down after the guide channels 750 to 790 have finished rotating. The flow speed of the spheres can be varied accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to aim at the second ball entrance 640 .

It should be noted that each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be constructed so as not to rotate by its own weight, but to rotate only by the passage of the game ball. Further, for example, each guide channel 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

Returning to FIG. 74, the description continues. As shown in FIG. 74 , below the detour accessory 700 , a large number of nails are provided so as to restrict the flowing direction of the game ball flowing out of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour accessory 700 . are placed. With these nails, all the game balls flowing out of the detour accessory 700 can be dropped onto the curved surface member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the first ball entrance 64 It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down in the direction). A game ball falling on the curved surface member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 800 and is guided toward the variable winning device 65 . As shown in FIG. 74, the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (there is only a width of less than one game ball). Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can be made to win (enter the ball) into the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the variable winning device 65 in a front view, a relatively wide space (with a width exceeding one game ball) for guiding the game ball to the out port 66 below the variable winning device 65. (channel) is provided. Therefore, when the specific winning hole 65a is open and the game ball is shot left-handed, although many game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, some of the game balls (for example, 10 1 ball per ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 65a.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the detour accessory 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. As a result, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a. It should be noted that, basically, the right-handed player takes a longer time to reach the specific winning hole 65a, but depending on the reflection direction and ejection situation of the game ball, the left-handed player may reach the specific winning hole 65a. There is also a non-zero possibility that the period until reaching the ball will be longer (for example, if a game ball fired to the left temporarily stops, or if a ball clog occurs in the left channel of the variable display unit 80) etc). For this reason, the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 has a longer period of time to reach the specific winning opening 65a than the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the left side. (the game ball that has flowed down the left channel tends to take a shorter time to reach the specific winning opening 65a).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the rate at which the right-handed game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a is calculated as follows: It can be higher than the rate of entering the ball. As a result, players who want to progress the jackpot game speedily (want to end the jackpot game early) will experience some loss (waste of about 1 ball out of 10 balls) during the execution of the jackpot game. The game can be played aiming at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting left handed, with the preparedness of the ball). On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate useless balls (loss) as much as possible, the game is aimed at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right, with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be long. can let Therefore, each player can select his or her favorite game during execution of the jackpot game, so that the game can be realized in accordance with the taste of each player. Each round of the jackpot ends when 30 seconds have passed since each round started, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a before the 30 seconds have passed. be done. Even if the game balls are shot right after each round of the jackpot is started, 10 game balls are allowed to pass through the detour accessories 700 before 30 seconds elapse and the specific winning opening 65a. (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, when hitting to the right, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being disadvantageous (the round ends before the specified number of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the big win.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won, substantially rectangular display areas HR2 and HR3 are formed in the main display area Dm on the upper left side in the front view and the upper right side in the front view. , and below the display regions HR2 and HR3, a display region HR4 having a substantially rectangular shape and an area larger than that of the display regions HR2 and HR3 is formed. In the display area HR2, an image resembling a left-pointing arrow is displayed, along with the characters "Left-handed, high-speed mode" and the characters "You can win big wins quickly." To make a player easily understand that the player can consume the big win in a relatively short period of time (the big win progresses at a relatively high speed) by hitting left during the big win by these display contents. can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76, an image resembling a rightward arrow is displayed in the display area HR3, along with the words ``Right shot in low speed mode'' and the words ``You can take your time to hit the jackpot''. characters are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the player hits right during the big win, the big win can be consumed in a relatively long time (the big win progresses at a relatively low speed). can be made

As shown in FIG. 76, various images and information indicating that the jackpot is in progress are displayed in the display area HR4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, an image TB imitating a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the central portion of the display area HR4, and an image " A display area HR6 is formed to which the characters "big win" are added. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the jackpot game is being executed. A display area HR5 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out) is formed in the upper left corner of the display area HR4. In the example of FIG. 76, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" and information showing a comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts). The display contents displayed in these display areas HR5 allow the player to easily understand the progress of the big win.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. configured to be long. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the percentage of right-handed game balls entering the specific winning hole 65a is calculated as follows: It is configured to be higher than the rate of entering the ball at 65a. With these configurations, a player who wants to progress the jackpot game speedily (want to win a large amount of prize balls in a short time) may experience some loss (1 ball out of 10 balls) during execution of the jackpot game. The game can be played aiming at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the left while being prepared for a certain percentage of useless balls). On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate waste balls (losses) as much as possible, they aim at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right, with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be long. can be done. Therefore, each player can select his or her favorite game during execution of the jackpot game, so that the game can be realized in accordance with the taste of each player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display unit 80, the period until the game ball fired by right hitting reaches the variable winning device 65 is reduced to It is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball shot by reaches the variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加That is, by making the path length of the game ball launched by right-handed hitting flow down longer than the path length of the game ball launched by left-handed hitting, the right-handed hitting is more likely to flow to the left. Although it is configured so that the flow time is longer than when hitting, it is not limited to this. For example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, instead of the detour accessory 700, a known crew member may be provided. By constructing in this way, the period from reaching the crooning means to passing through the crooning means can be lengthened, so that the flow-down time of the game ball shot by hitting to the right can be lengthened. Further, for example, in place of the detour accessory 700, an accessory that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the channel provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Of these, the right side of the game board 13 is made of a material (e.g., an elastic body such as rubber) having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is equal to that of the base plate 60. It may be configured to be easily decelerated by the friction of the In addition, instead of the detour accessory 700, by making the arrangement of the nails different between the left channel and the right channel of the variable display device unit 80, the flow down the right channel is the same as the left channel. It may take a longer time to reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) than when it flows down the path.

In the fifth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, the game characteristics when hitting left and the game characteristics when hitting right are displayed in the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, respectively. Although it has been configured to display in response to the display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during a big win, only an image that encourages hitting to the left may be displayed, or only an image that encourages hitting to the right may be displayed. Since the big win can be completed in a short period of time by displaying only the image prompting left-handed hitting, a large amount of prize balls can be won in a short period of time. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which only an image that encourages hitting to the right is displayed, useless balls (game balls that enter the out hole 66 without entering the specific winning hole 65a) can be reduced. , the player's profit in the jackpot can be increased.

Further, when notifying the player of the shooting direction during the big win, the shooting direction to be notified may be changed according to the type of the big win, the type of the performance performed during the big win, or the like. More specifically, for example, when a probability variable jackpot is achieved, a variable display effect (a production mode that is executed only when a probability variable jackpot is achieved) is executed in which the main symbols (probability variable symbols) with odd numbers are aligned. Or, it is determined by lottery whether to execute a variable display performance (a performance mode always executed when a normal jackpot is achieved) in which main patterns (ordinary patterns) with even-numbered numbers are aligned. Then, when it is determined that the normal big win or the variable probability big win and the performance that the normal patterns are aligned by lottery are determined, the performance for informing whether or not the variable probability big win is during the big win is executed. . In this case, a production mode for notifying whether it is a variable probability jackpot (for example, a performance in which it is not known whether it is a variable probability jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, and an immediate notification at the end of the first round The player is made to select either the effect mode that is announced or the effect mode that does not know where in each round of the jackpot) (that is, the operation means such as buttons and levers that the player can operate) is provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and the selection of the effect mode may be executed in the first round. Then, in order to ensure a longer time for selecting the performance mode, in the first round of the big win notified by the variable display performance in which the normal patterns are aligned (the big win of the normal pattern notification), it is configured to suggest hitting to the right. may be By configuring in this way, a longer period can be ensured for allowing the player to select the presentation mode, so that the player can be made to more reliably select the preferred presentation mode. On the other hand, when the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when a big hit is notified by a variable display effect in which the variable probability symbols are aligned), it may be configured to notify a left-handed hit during the big win. . By configuring in this way, the period until the end of the big win can be shortened, so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the normal jackpot or the probability variable jackpot is obtained and the normal patterns are aligned by lottery, the production for informing whether or not the probability variable jackpot is achieved in the first round of the jackpot is executed. In the production, an production (operation production) prompting the user to operate the operating means may be executed. More specifically, for example, push buttons that can be pressed by the player are provided as operation means, and an effect is executed to prompt the player to continuously press the push buttons within a predetermined period. Depending on the number of times the push button is pressed, the display mode is changed (for example, the gauge of the indicator is accumulated), and the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge is filled). Accumulating up to the maximum of the indicator) may be configured to notify that it is a probability variable jackpot. In this case, when a normal jackpot or a probability variable jackpot is obtained, and when a performance in which normal patterns are aligned is determined by a lottery (when an operation performance is executed), a right-handed hit is reported in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the round period of one round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period can be secured for performing the operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the operation performance. On the other hand, when it becomes a probability variable jackpot and the production of matching probability variable patterns is determined by lottery (when the operation production is not executed), the jackpot is achieved by notifying the left-handed hit in the first round. The period until completion can be shortened. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

In addition, instead of selecting the effect mode when notifying whether or not it is a variable probability jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (voice effect) played during the execution of the jackpot game is selected. It may be configured to be selectable, and at least right-handed hitting may be notified during the period for selecting a song (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (sound effect). Images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) pieces of music set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on this music selection menu screen. In addition, instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operation means such as a button that can be operated by the player, and a music selection menu screen is displayed according to the operation contents of the operation means. 1 image is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, the images corresponding to each song are arranged in a vertical line, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) appears lit, and the other images appear unlit. configured as follows. Also, as operation means, there are provided three types of buttons: a button corresponding to upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to decision operation (decision button). do. Then, by detecting pressing of the upper button during the music selection period, the image that was illuminated immediately before the pressing is switched to appear to be off, and the image that was arranged one above is switched to appear to be illuminated. (the image that appears to be illuminated moves upward by one). Likewise, when it is detected that the lower button has been pressed, the illuminated image is configured to move downward by one position. Furthermore, by detecting the depression of the decision button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that appears to be lit at the time of depression is determined as the music to be reproduced during the current jackpot. That is, it is set as a piece of music to be reproduced from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reproduce the player's favorite music during the big win, so that the player's interest in the game during the big win can be further improved.

In such a situation, if left-handed hits are notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, so the music selection period is shortened. For this reason, there is a possibility that the music selection period will end before the player selects the desired music by operating the up button and the down button and sets the reproduction by pressing the enter button. On the other hand, a right-handed hit is notified during the first round (music selection period) of a jackpot (a jackpot in which the performance of selecting a music piece is determined) for which a music selection period is set, thereby achieving one round. Since the eye round period can be set to a relatively long period, the player can search for a favorite song from the song selection menu screen (operate the upper and lower buttons so that the corresponding image appears to light up). a longer period for making a decision (pressing a decision button). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the player selects a favorite song without rushing the player, so that the convenience of the player when selecting a song can be enhanced. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which left-handed hitting is notified during the first round of a jackpot (jackpot where a normal jackpot performance is executed) in which the music selection period is not set, the game is prevented from being slowed down and speedy. A jackpot game can be digested. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate shooting direction according to the effect mode executed during the big win.

Furthermore, in the case where the effect (operation effect) prompting the player to operate the operating means, such as setting the music selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate in the case of a big win, the player's past A configuration may be adopted in which the firing direction notified in the first round is varied according to the operation situation (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is possible to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has operated the operation means in the first round of the big win in which the operation presentation is set. Then, when starting the jackpot with the operation effect set, the game is played over the big win with the operation effect set a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) based on the stored past operation history. When the player does not operate, the configuration may be such that a left-handed hit is notified, while a right-handed hit is notified when the player has performed an operation in a jackpot within a predetermined number of times. That is, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even when the operation performance is executed, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time by informing the player of left-handed hitting to end the first round of the jackpot earlier. While realizing the playability that can be acquired, for the player who tends to actively operate during the operation performance, the execution period of the operation performance is extended by notifying the player of the right-handed hitting, so that the player can enjoy the operation performance. It is possible to secure a period for performing sufficient operations on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability according to the tendency of the player.

In the fifth embodiment, a right-handed hitter has a higher ball entry rate into the specific winning hole 65a than a left-handed hitter. Although the configuration is slightly advantageous, the configuration for giving the right-handed hitter an advantage on the winning ball is not limited to this. For example, instead of setting the same rate of entering the specific winning hole 65a between the game ball fired by right-handed and the game ball fired by left-handed, the right side of the specific winning hole 65 A general winning hole with a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15) may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball hit to the right to enter and a game ball hit to the right can enter. That is, in the state in which the specific winning hole 65a is open, the left-handed game ball basically enters the specific winning hole 65a, and some of the game balls cannot enter the specific winning hole 65a and are out. While flowing down to the opening 66, the right-handed game ball basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a part of the game balls may enter the general winning opening. With this configuration, when a right-handed ball is hit, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning hole is a prize ball due to a big hit (that is, the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a). Since it is awarded in addition to the award ball), it is possible to make it more advantageous to hit the right during the big hit. Therefore, a player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to hit to the right while being prepared for a long jackpot period. On the other hand, for a player who wants to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter period of time, it is recommended that the left-handed hit be made during the big win, with the expectation that the prize ball surface will be somewhat disadvantageous compared to the right-handed hit. can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the features of the case of hitting to the right and the features of hitting to the left are simply displayed in the display areas HR2 and HR3 (see FIG. 76). ), but not limited to For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether a right-handed or left-handed ball is played is placed at a predetermined location on the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the left channel and the right channel of the variable display unit 80). A configuration may be adopted in which detection means such as the above is provided, and the direction in which the player shoots the game ball is determined from the detection result of the detection means. And it is good also as a structure which changes the production|presentation during a big hit according to the determined shooting direction. For example, when a right-handed hit is detected, the display area HR2 is turned off and the display area HR3 is turned on, while when a left-handed hit is detected, the display area HR2 is turned on and the display area HR3 is turned on. It is good also as a structure which makes it look like it turned off. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand what kind of game characteristics will be obtained by the shooting direction selected by the player.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 89. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the game ball flows through the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 more than when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. When it flows down, it takes longer to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged). It constituted the path length of the flow path, the flowing direction of the game ball, and the like. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open (that is, during execution of the jackpot game), the game is played by hitting the right hand more than when the game ball is shot by hitting the left hand. A game board 13 having a board surface configuration is adopted so that winning (entering a ball) into a specific winning hole 65a is facilitated at a higher rate when a ball is shot.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a right variable winning device 650 is provided as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during the jackpot. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the big win, and the game ball enters during the big win, so that the variable state of the special symbol is established after the big win. Granted. On the other hand, the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are provided by entering game balls. In addition, the right specific winning hole 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left and when hitting right. , the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 increases while the right specific winning port 650a is in a state where it can enter, but the rate at which the reaching game balls enter the right specific winning port 650a is configured to be low. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit to the right in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning hole 650a is in a state in which the ball can be entered decreases, but the game that has reached It is configured such that the percentage of balls entering the right specific winning hole 650a is high. As a result, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be varied according to the launch direction of the game ball. Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is increased, or a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is small, but the rate of entering a ball is increased.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in Section 6. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 77, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 77, in the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment, a curved member 810 is provided in place of the curved member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 74) of the fifth embodiment. There is a difference. A right variable winning device 650 is arranged on a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810 as shown in FIG.

The right variable prize winning device 650 is provided with a laterally long rectangular right specific prize winning port 650a in its substantially central portion. The specific winning opening 650a is normally closed by the opening/closing door 650f1 (that is, the state is set so that it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot starts, the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed by the jackpot type. is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening/closing pattern. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, the state in which it is possible to enter the right specific winning hole 650a and the state in which it is difficult to enter are switched in a specific switching pattern. When the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a while the opening/closing door 650f1 is open (while the ball can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650a), the gaming state after the jackpot ends. , The probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set (the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON at the end of the big hit). On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the right specific winning hole 650a even once in one big win, the game state after the big win is a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time saving state. It is set (100 is set to the value of the counter 203f during time saving). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a than when the game ball never enters the right specific winning port 650a during the jackpot. (The game state after the end of the jackpot becomes advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 77, the right specific prize winning port 650a is arranged along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, so that the game ball that passed through the detour accessory 700 and dropped onto the curved surface member 810 , by rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, it is possible to easily reach the right specific winning opening 650a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the left end of the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 and the left end of the right specific prize winning opening 650a are arranged substantially on the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved surface member 820 provided below the left channel of the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end of the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end of the curved surface member 810. . Between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, as shown in FIG. With these configurations, when a game ball that is hit to the left and has passed through the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 820. reach the right end. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right in the front view flows down in the lower right direction in the front view while interfering with the nail planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. and reaches the left end of the curved surface member 810 . A game ball that reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 from the left side of the curved surface member 810 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 in the right direction in front view, thereby easily reaching the right specific winning opening 650a. can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can reach the right variable winning device 650 regardless of whether the game ball is hit to the right or left. Therefore, in the first round of the big win, the game ball can be shot in a desired direction.

Next, referring to FIG. 78, the structure of right variable winning device 650 will be described in more detail. FIG. 78(a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed (a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right specific winning port 650a), FIG. 78(b) shows that the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is switched from the closed state to the open state (the game ball is switched from the state in which it is difficult to enter the right specific winning port 650a to the state in which it is possible to enter). FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in the state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the state where the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, the left end of the opening/closing door 650f1 closing the right specific winning opening 650a and the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, the right variable winning device The portion on the left side of 650 (left floor surface 810b) is smoothly connected with almost no step. On the other hand, at the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1, there is a convex portion 650g1 for suppressing the game ball rolling from the left side in the front view from passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 and rolling to the right. is provided. Since the convex portion 650g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1, the game ball rolling on the opening/closing door 650f1 from the left side of the opening/closing door 650f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 650g1 and rolls. motion stops. As shown in FIG. 78(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view. The upper surface of the door 650f1 flows down in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Then, it rolls on the left floor surface 810 b in the left direction in front view and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66 . In addition, since the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a strong momentum due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, the opening and closing door In the state where 650f1 is closed, the liquid can flow down to the direction of the out port 66 over the convex portion 650g1. In this way, by arranging the right variable winning device 650 in an inclined manner, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating in the upper part of the opening/closing door 650f1 during the period when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. and can flow down.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right specific prize winning port 650a switches to a state in which a ball can be entered, the opening/closing door 650f1 blocking the upper part of the right specific prize winning port 650a The opening/closing door 650f1 is opened by sliding to the left in front view. As shown in FIG. 78(b), while the opening/closing door 650f1 is being opened, a game ball rolling from the right side in the front view can enter the right specific winning hole 650a, but is rolled from the left side in the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 650g1 and becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning hole 650.例文帳に追加Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the projection 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b are almost at the same height (they are connected almost smoothly). ), the game ball rolling from the left side of the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning hole 650a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the flow direction of the game ball reaching the right variable winning device 650 when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed and opened will be described. . First, FIG. 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right variable prize winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 79(a), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the protrusion 650g1 provided at the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1 and the left floor surface 810b are approximately the same height. As a result, a game ball rolling from the left direction in front view of the right variable winning device 650 can easily pass through the convex portion 650g1. That is, the ball can easily enter (win) the right specific prize winning opening 650a without being hindered by the convex portion 650g1. In addition, game balls rolling from the right direction of the right variable winning device 650 (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a) are also prevented from entering the right specific winning hole 650a (winning a prize). , the player can easily enter (win) the right specific winning hole 650a.

FIG. 79(b) is a sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, the right specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the opening/closing door 650f1, so that the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball that rolls against the right variable winning device 650 from the left direction in the front view is subjected to gravity acting downward to the left due to the inclination upward to the upper right formed by the opening/closing door 650f1. Therefore, the momentum of rolling is reduced. In addition, since the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1 is provided with a convex portion 650g1 that protrudes upward from the other portion of the opening/closing door 650f1, even if the force of the rolling toward the right direction is strong, the opening/closing door 650f1 is almost Even if it can climb all the way up, it is prevented from reaching the right floor surface 810a side by the convex portion 650g1. Therefore, it flows downward to the left along the inclination of the opening/closing door 650f1 and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the game ball rolling on the right variable winning device 650 from the right direction in the front view is in a state where sufficient momentum is added to overcome the convex portion 650g1 due to the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to climb over the convex portion 650g1 and pass through the opening/closing door 650f1. Thereby, it can be dropped from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 (right specific winning opening 650a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the sixth embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the jackpot type (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning hole 650a is set to be able to enter for a relatively long period of time, and the jackpot for a relatively short period of time. A jackpot type (jackpot B6) that is set to a possible state is provided. If the state in which the ball can be entered becomes longer, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the right specific winning hole 650a increases, so the state in which the game state after the end of the big hit is advantageous (variable state of special symbols and time saving of normal symbols) state). Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A6 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B6 (the game state after the jackpot ends tends to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the opening pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a set in the first round of the jackpot A6 will be referred to as an opening pattern that can win a V prize, and the right specific winning opening 650a set in the first round of the jackpot B6. The opening pattern of the winning opening 650a is referred to as an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult.

FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right specific winning hole 650a when an opening pattern capable of winning a V prize (an opening pattern set in the first round of the A6 jackpot) is set. . When the V-winning open pattern is set, first, the right specific winning opening 650a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, when 1.5 seconds have passed, the right specific winning opening 650a is switched from the closed state to the open state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 80(a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right specific winning opening 650a until the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened. Therefore, it will be completely released 1.8 seconds after the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have passed (that is, when 2.0 seconds have passed since the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right specific winning opening 650a is started. . This closing action, like the opening action, is completed in 0.3 seconds (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round). When the right specific winning opening 650a is completely closed, the closed state of the right specific winning opening 650a continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed (that is, when 2.8 seconds have passed since the start of the first round), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened in 0.3 seconds, remains open in 0.2 seconds, and closes in 0.3 seconds.

After that, the completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and the opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is 0.2 seconds A series of actions that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds) are repeated. Due to this repeated operation, in the opening pattern in which the V winning is possible, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the big win. Also, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the final opening/closing operation is performed after 8.0 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. Here, in the sixth embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment, a detour accessory 700 is arranged in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 to lengthen the flow time of the game ball. . When the game ball hit to the right passes through the detour accessory 700, the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the right variable winning device 650 are equally arranged) ) is 7 to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the right hitting is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 over a period of at least 7 seconds from the start of the round. Therefore, when hitting to the right, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 around the start of the last open period in the open pattern in which V can be won (when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the first round). . For this reason, when hitting to the right in the first round, there is a possibility that the game ball can enter the right specific winning hole 650a only in the last opening period among the six opening periods. be.

On the other hand, if you continue to hit left in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (first ball entrance 64, variable winning device 65, right variable winning device) Since the game ball reaches the area where 650 are equally arranged), if the game ball is immediately left-handed at the start of the first round, the game ball can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first open period. can. That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the ball into the right specific winning hole 650a. However, as described above, the game ball rolling from the left side toward the right specific winning hole 650a has an open period of 1 (completely closed after opening is started) compared to the game ball rolling from the right side. 0.8 seconds until the end), the period during which the ball can be entered into the right specific winning hole 650a is shortened. Furthermore, when hitting to the left, more game balls cannot reach the right variable winning device 650 than when hitting to the right. That is, by slipping through the plurality of nails planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, when the game ball enters the out port 66 without reaching the curved surface member 810, or the second 1 There are cases where the ball enters the ball entrance 64 . Therefore, when the opening pattern capable of winning V is set, the number of game balls reaching while the right specific winning opening 650a is open is large by hitting left in the first round. The playability is such that the rate of throwing balls becomes low and the number of wasted balls increases. On the other hand, when hitting to the right in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls reaching while the right specific winning hole 650a is open is small, but the rate of entering balls is high. becomes. Therefore, since the playability of the first round can be varied according to the shooting direction of the game ball, the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be improved. In the first round of the jackpot, the probability that the game ball will enter the ball during one round is almost the same (for example, about 80%) when hitting with the right hand and when hitting with the left hand. As shown, the opening period, board configuration, etc. are set.

FIG. 80(b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right specific winning hole 650a when an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize (an opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot B6) is set. be. When an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize is set, as shown in FIG. be. Therefore, it becomes extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the right specific winning hole 650a while the right specific winning hole 650a is open, regardless of whether the ball is hit to the left or to the right ( The possibility of a game ball entering during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, the player can expect that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A6 (the opening pattern that allows the V win is set).

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening/closing door 650f1 during one open period when the opening pattern capable of winning a V prize is set. As shown in FIG. 81, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the open/close door 650f1. It becomes impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 81(a)). Then, at the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 starts to open, the opening/closing door 650f1 slides to the left in the front view, and is housed inside the curved surface member 810 . When 0.1 second has passed since the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right specific prize winning opening 650a that is not blocked by the opening/closing door 650f1 becomes the width of one game ball or more (FIG. 81). (b)). As a result, the game ball rolling from the right direction can enter the right specific winning hole 650a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left direction is inclined upward to the upper right direction formed by the portion of the opening/closing door 650f1 that is not stored inside the curved surface member 810, and the convex portion 650g1. The ball is prevented from entering the specific winning hole 650a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right specific winning hole 650a as in the state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. This state where the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right specific winning hole 650a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter continues for 0.1 seconds. Then, when 0.1 seconds have passed (that is, when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the opening operation), most of the opening/closing door 650f1 is stored inside the curved surface 810 (the convex portion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b are closed). The width between the right end and the right end is less than one game ball), the game ball that reaches the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 650g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1. (See FIG. 81(c)). Therefore, even a game ball that rolls onto the right variable winning device 650 from the left side in front view can pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning hole 650a. That is, both the game ball rolling from the right direction (game ball fired by right-handed hitting) and the game ball rolling from the left direction (game ball fired by left-handed hitting) both pass through the right specific winning port 650a. It becomes possible to enter the ball. After that, until the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, game balls rolling from both directions (both right and left) can enter the right specific winning hole 650a.

As shown in FIG. 81, when 0.3 seconds have passed since the opening operation was started, the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the convex portion 650g1 is exposed to the outside (the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened) (see FIG. 81(d)). This fully opened state lasts for 0.2 seconds as described above, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the closing action is initiated. This closing operation is executed in the same time (ie, 0.3 seconds) as the operation opposite to that of the opening operation. Therefore, during the period from when the opening operation is started until the open/close door 650f1 is closed again, the period during which the game ball can enter the right variable winning device 650a is the same as that of the opening operation when hitting to the right. It is 0.6 seconds from 0.1 seconds after the start until 0.1 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, in the case of left-handed hitting, the time is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. That is, the ratio of the game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 to enter is higher in the case of hitting to the right than in the case of hitting to the left.

Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the period during which the game ball can be placed in the right specific winning hole 650a is determined by the game ball reaching from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 or the game ball reaching from the left side. It is configured to be variable depending on whether it is a game ball. As a result, when a game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 from the right side, it can be strongly expected to enter the right specific winning hole 650a. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, more game balls enter the right variable winning device 650 in the first round of the jackpot when left-handed than when right-handed. It is configured to reach the Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, when the game ball is hit to the left in the first round, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right specific winning hole 650a. When the ball is hit, it is easy for the game ball to enter the left specific winning hole 650a, but it is possible to realize a game property in which there is little opportunity for the ball to enter. Therefore, since the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the shooting direction of the game ball, the player's interest in the game in the first round can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, by providing the convex portion 650g1 at the right end of the open/close door 650f1, the period in which the game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right specific winning hole 650a is changed from the right side. Although it is configured to be shorter than the period during which the moving game ball can enter, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 650g1. Even if the convex portion 650g1 is removed, due to the inclination of the opening/closing door 650f1 formed in the upper right direction, the opening/closing door 650f1 rolls from the left side during the opening operation (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 81(b)). It is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the right specific winning hole 650a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, there is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round of the jackpot A6 (jackpot in which an opening pattern that allows V winning is set) in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, when the first round of the jackpot A6 is started, the characters "Left-handed hitting a few hits mode" and " The number of arrivals is large, but it is difficult to enter V!" and an image simulating a leftward arrow is displayed. According to these display contents, when hitting to the left, more game balls can reach the right variable winning device 650, while it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter the right specific winning hole 650a (V winning It is possible to make the player easily understand that the game becomes difficult to play).

Also, as shown in FIG. 82, the display area HR3 is provided with the characters ``Right-handed one-hit deadly mode'', the characters ``Although the number of hits is small, it is easy to enter V!'', and a rightward arrow. The selected image is displayed. According to these display contents, when hitting to the right, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 decreases, while the game balls become easier to enter the right specific winning hole 650a (V winning becomes easier). It is possible to make the player easily understand that it becomes sexuality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, in the display area HR4 of the third symbol display device 81, an image imitating the right variable winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed. In addition, on the front side of the variable prize winning device 650, a decoration imitating the alphabet "V" is displayed, and on the upper left side in the front view of the display area HR4, "Aim for V!" !” is displayed in the display area HR7. According to these display contents, by making the game ball enter the right variable prize winning device 650 which is decorated like the letter "V", the result will be advantageous for the player (after the big win It is possible to make the player easily understand that the special symbol is in a probability changing state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, in the display area HR4, the right variable winning device 650 is directed to the left side and the upper right side in front view with respect to the image imitating the right variable winning device 650. An arrow image is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side of the image simulating the right variable prize winning device 650 when viewed from the front is labeled with the words "A few hits will win", and the arrow displayed on the upper right side when viewed from the front. The image is labeled with the words "one hit kill". According to these display contents, when the player hits to the left according to the display contents of the display area HR2 (selects a mode that hits a few hits), the game ball hits the right variable winning device 650 from the left direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to make the player easily understand that the ball is rolling. In addition, when the player hits to the right according to the display contents of the display area HR3 (selects the one-hit deadly mode), the game ball rolls toward the right variable winning device 650 from the upper right direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to make the player easily understand that. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand which direction should be focused on to confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650a.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 83, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is open to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9(a)). The difference is that a pattern table 202aa is added. Also, the contents of the first win type selection table 202b have been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines the opening pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a in the first round of the jackpot (either opening pattern that allows V winning or opening pattern that makes V winning difficult) for each jackpot type. . The opening pattern table 202aa defines data indicating the start timing of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 650f1. At the start of the first round of the jackpot, the opening pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is selected from the opening pattern table 202aa and set as the opening pattern of the first round. By prescribing the opening pattern (starting timing of the opening/closing operation) in the opening pattern table 202aa, the opening/closing door 650f1 can be opened/closed with the same opening pattern in each big win.

Next, with reference to FIG.83(b), the detail of the 1st hit classification|category selection table 202b in the 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG.83(b) is the figure which showed the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in the 6th Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", "jackpot A6" are defined in association with each other (see 202b1 in FIG. 83). This "jackpot A6" has 16 rounds, and in the first round of the jackpot, there is an open pattern that can win a V prize (at a rate of about 80%, a game ball can enter the right specific prize hole 650a. It is a jackpot type in which an open pattern) is set. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random values) associated with the "jackpot A6" are 80 "0 to 79". The ratio of determining "jackpot A6" in the case of a jackpot is 80% (80/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99". B6" is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 83). This "jackpot B6" has 16 rounds, and in the first round of the jackpot, there is an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize (an opening pattern that makes it almost impossible to enter a game ball into the right specific winning hole 650a). It is a jackpot type to be set. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random numbers) associated with the "jackpot B6" are 20 of "80 to 99". The ratio of determining "jackpot B6" when a jackpot is achieved is 20% (20/100).

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured to provide a jackpot type in which an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize is set, but it is not always necessary to provide an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize. For example, instead of setting an open pattern that can win a V prize whenever the jackpot hits, by reducing the rate of winning a V prize, the rate of setting the probability variable state after the jackpot ends is the same as in the sixth embodiment. may be adjusted so that By configuring in this way, the number of open patterns can be reduced, so the amount of data in the open pattern table 202aa can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 84, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 8). The difference is that a counter 203ab, a winning number counter 203ac, a remaining ball timer flag 203ad, a remaining ball timer 203ae, a variable probability effective flag 203ag, a variable probability effective timer 203ah, and a discharge number counter 203af are added. there is

The variable probability setting flag 203aa is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650a during the jackpot game. Here, inside the right variable winning device 650, a probability variable switch 650e (not shown) is arranged at a position through which the game ball entered from the right specific winning hole 650a always passes. When the output of the variable probability switch 650e is turned on, it is determined that the game ball has entered the right specific winning hole 650a, and the variable probability setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305 in FIG. 88, FIG. 89 (see S1410 of ). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203aa is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 87). The variable probability setting flag 203aa is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, when the variable probability setting flag 203aa is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 650e before the power is cut off, and it can be determined that it has passed. Only in this case, the variable probability setting flag 203aa may be formally set to ON to return. In this case, whether the variable probability switch 650e is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203ab, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage of holes by determining fraud such as turning on only the variable probability setting flag 203aa and turning on the power again while the power is off.

The variable probability passage counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 650e after one round (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot) during the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the right specific winning hole 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in the first round have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203ab and the ejection number counter 203af, which will be described later. . This variable probability passage counter 203ab is updated by adding one value each time it detects passage of the variable probability switch 650e in a predetermined period after one round is completed (so-called ball sweeping period) (Fig. 89 S1409). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls that have won the right specific winning hole 650a and the number of discharge matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1415 in FIG. 89). It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203ab is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203ac is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in each round of the jackpot game. . Specifically, the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65, or the above-described probability variable switch 650e provided in the right variable winning device 650 is detected that the game ball has passed Based on this, 1 is added and updated (S1303 in FIG. 88). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winning variable winning device 65 and right variable winning device 650 (total value of winning number counter 203ac and probability variable passage counter 203ab) and the number of discharged ( After it is determined whether or not the value of the discharged number counter 203af) matches, it is reset to the initial value of "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 89). The value of the winning number counter 203ac is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203ad indicates that when game balls remain inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 at the time the round ends, the balls for discharging the remaining game balls are This is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period of time. When the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203ae, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 89).

The remaining ball timer 203ae has game balls remaining inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 at the time when the specific winning port 65a or the right specific winning port 650a is closed after the end of one round. In this case, it is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the remaining game balls to be ejected has passed. The time required until the game ball is discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the sixth embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae. Based on the upper limit value (in this embodiment, 0.8 seconds) of the remaining ball timer 203ae, the number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged matches. A determination is made as to whether or not there is a user (S1411 in FIG. 89). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to inform early that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 . In addition, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally leaving the game ball in the right variable prize winning device 650 and letting the game ball flow down to the variable probability switch 65e at the timing of the first round of the big win.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 650e. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The discharge number counter 203af is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged outside from the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 in each round of the jackpot. This discharge number counter 203af counts the number of game balls passing through a ball discharge port for discharging game balls from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or right variable winning device 650). The ball discharge port switch is turned on by the passage of the game ball), the value is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 89). After it is determined that the number of winning balls in the device 650 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to 0 (S1414 in FIG. 89).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 85, the jackpot control process 7 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 7 (S921) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) of the main controller 110 instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30 and S904) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is the process to be performed.

Of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011, the jackpot control process (FIG. 30) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) See), the same processes as the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), opening according to the round and jackpot type A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1021), and the process ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the process of S1011 (S1011 Yes), to set the game state after the jackpot ends (S1022), and ends this process. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1022) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific Winning processing for performing processing according to winning to the winning opening 650a is executed (S1023). Details of the winning process (S1023) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1023) is completed, abnormal processing is executed to determine whether the game balls entering the specific winning hole 65a and the right specific winning hole 650a are discharged normally (S1024), End this process. The details of this abnormality processing (S1024) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, details of the above-described jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1021). This jackpot action setting process (S1021) is, as described above, a process for setting the opening action according to the round and jackpot type.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101). ), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the release pattern corresponding to the jackpot type this time is read from the release pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the current jackpot type is jackpot A6, the V-winning open pattern (see FIG. 80(a)) is read, while if the current jackpot type is jackpot B6, V winning is difficult. open pattern (see FIG. 80(b)).

When the process of S1103 is completed, the start of the release pattern read out in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. In the process of S1105 executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), it is possible to open/close control the right specific winning opening 650a in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the jackpot ending process (S1022) will be described. This jackpot end process (S1022) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end processing (S1022), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203aa is on (S1201), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203aa is off (S1201: No), this time Since it means that no game ball entered (wins) into the right specific winning hole 650a during the big win, the value of the counter 203f during time saving is set to 100 to set the game state after the big win. is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203aa is ON (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the right specific winning hole 650a during this big hit. , By setting the probability variable flag 203e to ON, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

In the process of S1204 executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the process of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204), The variable probability setting flag 203aa is set to OFF (S1205), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 87), an appropriate game state can be set according to the state of the variable probability setting flag 203aa.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the details of the winning process (S1023) will be described. This prize winning process (S1023) is, as described above, a process for performing a process corresponding to the winning of the specific winning hole 65a and the right specific winning hole 650a. In the winning process (S1023), first, it is determined whether or not the current round valid period is reached (S1301). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the opening state of the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the current round valid period is reached (S1301: Yes), then the winning to one of the specific winning openings (the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a) is requested. It is determined whether it is detected (S1302), and if it is determined that the winning to the specific winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a) is not detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1306. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning for the specific winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a) has been detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203ac is updated by adding 1 (S1303). ). Next, it is determined whether or not this round is the first round (S1304), and if it is determined that it is the first round (S1304: Yes), in the first round of the jackpot, the right specific winning opening 650a Since it means that the player has won a ball (winning a prize), the variable probability setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the current round is not the first round (S1304: No), the process of S1305 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1306.

In the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize winning number counter 203ac has reached a value of 10 or more (S1306). Yes), the process proceeds to S1308 to set the end of this round. On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is less than 10 (S1306: No), then it is determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1307). If it has passed (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1308 to set the end of this round. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1307: No), the round does not need to end, so this process ends. In the process of S1307, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has passed if the end timing of the set release pattern has come. It is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round.

In the processing of S1308, closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) is set (S1308), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1309). Next, by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203ad to ON, the ball sweeping period is set (S1310), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, details of the abnormality processing (S1024) will be described. This abnormal process (S1024) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not the game balls entering the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a have been discharged normally. In this abnormal processing (S1024), first, it is determined whether or not the current round valid period is reached (S1401). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball is discharged from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device) ejected) (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203af (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is ON (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is OFF (S1404: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is ON (S1404: Yes), it means that the current is in the pitching period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is 1. is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ball sweeping period (when 0.8 seconds have passed since the end of the round)) (S1406), and the remaining ball timer If it is determined that the value of 203ae is not the upper limit value (not the end timing of the ball sweeping period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether the current ball sweeping period is after the end of the first round. (S1407), when it is determined that it is the ball sweeping period after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 650e (S1408), and the variable probability switch If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through 650e (S1408: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 650e (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203ab (S1409), and the variable probability setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1410), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the current ball sweeping period is the ball sweeping period after the end of the second and subsequent rounds (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410 Skip the process and end the present process as it is.

In addition, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (it is the end timing of the ball sweeping period) (S1406: Yes), then value) matches the number of winning prizes (the sum of the value of the winning number counter 203ac and the value of the variable probability passage counter 203ab) (S1411).

In the processing of S1411, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, while the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 650e3.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1411 that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S1411: Yes), the processing of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to OFF (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203ac, the discharge number counter 203af, and the variable probability passage counter 203ab are reset (S1415), and this process is finished.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 89), each specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a , and the right variable winning device 650a) can be detected early and notified of the occurrence of a problem that the game ball entered is not normally discharged.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the game ball enters during execution of the jackpot game (during the special game state), so that a privilege (prize ball) is awarded to the player. As the winning device, two types of the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 are provided. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which it is possible to enter a ball in the first round of the big win. A probability change state of the pattern is given. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650a, whether or not the game state after the big win is advantageous for the player changes. A game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the ball.

The right specific winning hole 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach regardless of whether the game ball is hit left or right. Although the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 increases while the 650a is in a state where it can enter, the ratio of the reaching game balls entering the right specific winning hole 650a is low. . On the other hand, if the player continues to hit to the right in the first round, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning hole 650a is in a state in which the ball can be entered decreases, but the game that has reached It is configured such that the rate of balls entering the right specific winning hole 650a is high. That is, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 during a predetermined period (the period until the opening pattern of one round ends) (the number of opportunities to win the right specific winning hole 650a) ( Element) is configured so that left-handed hitting is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. In addition, the aspect (element) of the ease of entering the ball (ball entering rate) for the right variable winning device 650 is configured so that right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting. As a result, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be varied according to the launch direction of the game ball. Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is increased, or a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is small, but the rate of entering a ball is increased. As a result, it is possible to realize game characteristics that suit the tastes of a greater number of players, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined period (first round) of the big win, when hitting with the right hand, it is more advantageous in terms of the ball entry rate than when hitting with the left hand (right side). A game ball that has reached the variable winning device 650a is more likely to enter the right specific winning hole 650a). (more game balls can easily reach the right variable winning device 650a). As a result, the advantage and disadvantage are different between right-handed and left-handed, so that the player can decide whether to play right-handed or left-handed. However, the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed players is not limited to this. For example, when the game ball is hit to the left, it is easy to enter (it is difficult to enter when the ball is hit to the right). There are many prize balls awarded when hitting (for example, 15 balls per time). A) position may be configured to provide a specific prize winning opening that has a long opening time (eg, 5 seconds maximum) but few prize balls are awarded (eg, 3 balls per time). Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific winning openings to be opened are alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds is extremely shortened (for example, to 0.1 second). By constructing in this way, the number of game balls entering the specific winning hole tends to decrease when left-handed hitting is continued during the big win, but the number is awarded when the ball enters the specific winning hole. It is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls increases. On the other hand, when the player continues hitting right during the big win, more game balls are likely to enter the specific winning hole, but fewer prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the specific winning hole. It is possible to realize sexuality. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a favorite game property and play the game. In addition, for example, a variable prize winning device 65 is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when hitting to the left (it is difficult to enter when hitting to the right), and the game ball enters when hitting to the right. The right variable winning device 650 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to enter the ball when hitting the left), and the variable winning device 65 is opened during the period in which the right variable winning device 650 is opened in one jackpot. It may be configured to be shorter than the period of time. That is, if the player continues to hit the ball to the right in one big win, the ball enters the right specific winning hole 650a and is likely to be given a variable probability state after the big win. When left-handed hitting is continued, many game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a large amount of winning balls can be obtained, while it becomes difficult to enter the balls into the right specific winning hole 650a. , the game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make the superiority different for each shooting direction during the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device that gives only winning balls to winning balls) and the right variable winning device 650 (a variable winning device that gives winning balls to winning balls and is in a variable state The positional relationship with the variable winning device that is also awarded) may be reversed. Moreover, setting the side (element) in which the right-handed player is more advantageous and the side (element) in which the left-handed player is more advantageous is not limited to the first round of the big win. For example, during a normal game, a configuration may be provided in which an element that makes left-handed hitting more advantageous than right-handed hitting and an element that makes right-handed hitting more advantageous than left-handed hitting. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a left ball entrance into which a game ball launched with a left strike can enter and a right ball entrance into which a game ball launched with a right strike can enter, A lottery for a special pattern is executed when a game ball enters one of the ball entrances. Then, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, by playing the game aiming at the right ball entrance with the right hand, it is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than left hand hitting, while left hand hitting is more efficient in terms of game efficiency. In this case, it is more disadvantageous than right-handed hitting, but if you win the jackpot, it is also possible to make it easier to select a jackpot type that is more advantageous than right-handed hitting (a type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state). good.

In the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (first round), when hitting to the right, the game ball reaching the right variable winning device 650a is specified to the right compared to the case of hitting to the left. While the ball is easily entered into the winning opening 650a, more game balls are likely to reach the right variable winning device 650a in the case of hitting to the left than in the case of hitting to the right. It was configured. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the shooting direction of the game ball in the first round of the big win. And it is good also as a structure which performs corresponding production|presentation according to the discharge direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when left-handed hitting is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 82) is such that the display area HR2 is illuminated and the display area HR3 is extinguished. Then, when a right-handed hit is detected, the display mode may be set such that the display area HR3 is lit and the display area HR2 is extinguished. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more easily understand the playability selected by the accident.

In the sixth embodiment, the open/close door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is configured to be opened by sliding to the left in the front view, so that the game that rolls from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 The ball is configured so that it can enter for a longer period than the game ball rolling from the left side, but the shape and operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing door 650f1 may be configured to open from the front side toward the back side in a front view. Then, the length of the front right side of the opening/closing door 650f1 may be set shorter than the length of the left front side in front view by one game ball or more. That is, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted to the rear side in the front view, the right side of the opening/closing door 650f1 becomes ready for a game ball earlier than the left side, and when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. Alternatively, when the opening/closing door 650f1 faces forward and protrudes forward, the left side of the opening/closing door 650f1 may be in a state in which the game ball can be deposited and paid out earlier. Even when configured in this manner, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the game ball rolling from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 is more likely to enter than the game ball rolling from the left side. It can be configured to allow longer periods of time.

In the sixth embodiment, due to the board structure, left-handed hitting is physically more advantageous than right-handed hitting. and the number of game balls that can reach the right variable winning device 650 during one round), which is more advantageous for right-handed than left-handed. It is not limited. For example, it may be realized by control. More specifically, for example, the right specific prize winning opening 650a is provided at a position where the arrival ratio of the game ball is the same regardless of whether the player hits to the right or hits to the left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured to be able to detect whether the player has hit the right side or the left side. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the opening pattern is made different between the case of opening and the opening. That is, when a right-handed hit is detected, the right specific prize-winning opening 650a is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of opening times of the right specific prize-winning opening 650a is small, but the opening period of each opening is relatively long, while left-hand hitting is detected. In this case, the right specific winning opening 650a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the number of openings of the right specific winning opening 650a is relatively large and the opening period of each opening is relatively short. Further, it is also possible to allow the player to select the game property of the big win by operating an operation means such as a button instead of the shooting direction of the game ball.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. In the above-described fifth embodiment, all game balls shot by hitting to the right are configured to pass through the detour accessory 700 . That is, when hitting to the right, it always takes 7 seconds to 8 seconds to flow down to the lower area (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are provided) on the game board 13. was. That is, in a normal game state other than during execution of a jackpot game, if the player hits to the right, the game efficiency deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, two types of flow paths are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and when flowing down one of the flow paths, it passes through the detour accessory 700 as in the fifth embodiment. While the game ball flows down to the variable winning device 65, if it flows down the other channel, the ball is avoided from entering the detour accessory 700, and the ball is difficult to enter the specific winning hole 65a. and That is, a flow path in which the period until the game ball enters one of the ball entrances (the first ball entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65, the out opening 66, the general winning opening 63, etc.) is relatively long, Two types of channels are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, one of which has a relatively short period until the ball enters one of the entrances. This makes it possible to vary the game performance according to the shooting direction of the game ball during the big win (although some waste balls may occur, the game performance allows the big win to be quickly digested and the waste balls are less likely to occur). , and a game property in which the period for digesting the big win is lengthened), while preventing the deterioration of the game efficiency in the case of playing the game by hitting to the right.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and 2, the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed. is. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fifth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the fifth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 90, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, in the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment, the game ball can flow down to the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front and to the left side of the detour accessory 700 when viewed from the front. It is different from the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment in that a channel is provided. Also, the difference is that the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 is removed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the channel provided with the detour accessory 700 will be referred to as the right first channel. The channel provided on the left side in front view is referred to as a right second channel.

As shown in FIG. 90, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 through which game balls can pass is provided above the right second flow path, and the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67. As a result, a lottery for normal symbols is executed in the same manner as in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, this normal ball entrance 67 is marked with the letters "GO". Below the normal ball entrance 67, a second ball entrance 640 into which game balls can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a special symbol lottery is executed in the same manner as when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁A special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. In the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), the percentage of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the state (whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or the special symbol is in a variable state). is configured to be On the other hand, the jackpot type determined when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit is different between when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit. (see FIG. 92(a)). More specifically, the jackpot type with a larger number of rounds is more likely to be determined when the second special symbol lottery wins than when the first special symbol lottery wins. It is configured. As a result, the player can be more pleased with the big win in the second special symbol lottery than the big win in the first special symbol lottery.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessary 640a that can be opened in the right direction when viewed from the front. While the electric accessory 640a is closed (in a vertically standing state), the game ball that has flowed into the right second flow path cannot enter the second ball inlet 640. On the other hand, while the electric accessory 640a is open (tilted to the right in front view), most of the game balls that have flowed into the right second flow path enter the second ball entrance 640. Ball becomes possible. This electric accessory 640a is variable to the open state under the same conditions as the electric accessory 64a of the fifth embodiment. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, when the lottery of the normal design wins, the opening period of "0.2 seconds x 1 time" and the number of times of opening are set, while the normal design In the time-saving state, when a win is obtained in the normal pattern lottery, an open period of "1 second x 2 times" and the number of open times are set. In addition to this, as in the fifth embodiment and the like, in the normal state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is 30 seconds, while in the time-saving state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is 3 seconds. be very short. Therefore, if a gaming method is performed in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right second flow path in the normal state of normal symbols, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 (a game ball is wasted). On the other hand, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the game method that shoots the game ball aiming at the right second flow path frequently (the number of game balls fired and the second ball entering Game balls can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 to the extent that the number of prize balls paid out by entering the entrance 640 is approximately the same. Therefore, in the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal design is set (probability variable state of the special design, and time-saving state of the normal design, or low probability state of the special design, and time-saving state of the normal design), the right second By continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the flow path, the second special pattern lottery that facilitates the determination of an advantageous jackpot type (jackpot type with a relatively large number of rounds) in the event of a big win is implemented. It can be run continuously without reduction. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal pattern, most of the game balls are wasted even if they are aimed at the right second flow path. You have to play. Even if a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special pattern, a disadvantageous jackpot type (jackpot type with a relatively small number of rounds) is likely to be determined, and moreover, the more left-handed the ball is, the less the ball is held. For this reason, it is possible to play a game while strongly anticipating the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

An out port 66 is provided below the second ball inlet 640 . When a game ball enters the out port 66, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without awarding a prize ball. With this out port 66, it is possible to prevent clogging of game balls in the right second flow path. In addition, as shown in FIG. 90, in the right second flow path, before the game ball enters one of the ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 or out port 66), There is almost no configuration that prevents the ball from flowing down (changes the direction of travel or slows down). Therefore, compared to the right first flow path, the period from launching a game ball to entering one of the ball entrances is extremely short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, the game can be played efficiently by shooting the game ball aiming at the right second flow path.

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, in addition to the right first channel provided with the detour accessory 700, the normal entrance 67 and the second entrance A right second flow path with 640 is provided. The second ball entrance 640 is in a state where it is easy to enter (the electric accessory 640a is easily opened) during the game state in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, so in the normal state of normal symbols, left-handed , and in a high-probability state of normal patterns, it is possible to make a right-handed strike. That is, even in the presence of the detour accessory 700, the player can enjoy switching the direction of shooting the game ball according to the game state during the normal game (game state other than the jackpot game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the present seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a game state in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set (probability variable state of special symbols, time saving state of normal symbols, low probability state of special symbols, and time saving state of normal symbols) It is the figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving state of normal symbols is set, the front view upper side in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (above the display area where the variable display of the third symbol is performed ), a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR8 is formed. For this display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 91, "Aim for 'GO' with a right shot! ! ” and an image resembling a rightward arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, the player hits the game ball to the right with a launch strength (shooting speed) that passes through a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 marked with the letters "GO". It can be easily understood that the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 as well.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, by shooting the game ball with a shooting intensity of 85% to 100% (that is, by rotating the operation handle 51 to a position of 85% to 100% of the movable range), the right The game ball can flow into the first flow path, and by shooting the game ball with a firing intensity of 60% to 90% (that is, the operating handle 51 is rotated to a position of 60% to 90% of the movable range By doing so), it becomes possible for the game ball to flow into the right second flow path. Here, when a game ball is shot with a launch strength in the range of 85% to 90%, it can flow into either the right first channel or the right second channel depending on the direction of repulsion of the game ball. have a nature. In addition, when the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity of 60% to 65%, there is a possibility that it will flow into the right second channel and the left channel of the variable display device unit 80. . On the other hand, when the game ball is shot with the launch intensity in the range of 91% to 100%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the right first channel. Further, when the game ball is shot within the range of the launch intensity of 66% to 84%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the right second flow path. Incidentally, when the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity of 25% to 59%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 . Further, when the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity of less than 25%, the game ball cannot be shot over the return ball preventing member 68, so that the game ball is not shot to the game area.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 92, the first winning type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9A). Only a part of the defined content of the table 202b is changed. As shown in FIG. 92(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment is that the lottery when winning the jackpot is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Depending on the presence, different jackpot types are defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots by lottery of the first special symbols, the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", as a jackpot type "Jackpot A7" is associated and defined (see 202b1 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot A7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random values) associated with the “jackpot A7” are five “0 to 4”, so the first The ratio (probability) of determining "jackpot A7" when the special pattern lottery results in a jackpot is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots by lottery of the first special symbols, the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 59", the jackpot type is "jackpot B7 ” is defined in correspondence (see 202b2 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 8, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. That is, although the number of rounds is smaller than that of "jackpot A7", the game state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous game state. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random numbers) associated with the "jackpot B7" are 55 from "5 to 59". The ratio (probability) of determining "jackpot B7" when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols is 55% (55/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots by lottery of the first special symbols, the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C7 ” are defined in correspondence (see 202b3 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot C7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 8, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a low-probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. That is, the "jackpot C7" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type because the number of rounds is the smallest and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is relatively disadvantageous. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random numbers) associated with the "jackpot C7" are 40 from "60 to 99". The ratio (probability) of determining the "jackpot C7" when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the second special symbols, the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 59", and the jackpot type is "jackpot D7." ” are defined in correspondence (see 202b4 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot D7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a variable probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. That is, like the "jackpot A7", this jackpot type is most advantageous to the player in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random numbers) associated with the "jackpot D7" are 60 of "0 to 59". The ratio (probability) of determining the "jackpot D7" when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is 60% (60/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the second special symbols, the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot E7 ” are defined in correspondence (see 202b5 in FIG. 92(a)). This "jackpot E7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time-saving state. That is, although the number of rounds is the largest, the game state after the big win is a big win type that is set to a relatively disadvantageous game state. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random numbers) associated with the "jackpot E7" are 40 from "60 to 99". The ratio (probability) of determining the "jackpot E7" when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is 40% (40/100).

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot (jackpot B7 or jackpot C7) of 8 rounds (relatively small number of rounds) at a rate of 95% ) is determined, and the jackpot (jackpot A7) of 16 rounds (relatively large number of rounds) is determined only at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a jackpot (either jackpot D7 or jackpot E7) of 16 rounds (relatively large number of rounds) is determined at a rate of 100%. there is As a result, a larger number of rounds is more likely to be determined when the lottery of the second special pattern is obtained than when the lottery of the first special pattern is obtained. In this case, the player can have a greater sense of expectation.

It should be noted that the method of making the big win of the second special symbol lottery more advantageous than the big win of the first special symbol lottery is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the ratio of determining the jackpot type in which the special symbols are in a probability variable state after the jackpot ends may be configured so that the jackpot by lottery of the second special symbols is higher. good. Further, for example, as the number of times of time saving when the normal jackpot hits, the number of times of time saving with more jackpots in the second special symbol may be easily selected.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). FIG. 92(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 8). Instead of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2, and instead of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, the first special symbol reserved ball The difference is that a number counter 203c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 . The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). there is That is, it has four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area), and each of these areas includes a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted to the execution area (see FIG. 11) ( (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the second special symbol reserved ball is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11), and each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area Based on this, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to 4 times, and the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203c2 is the second ball entrance 640. The number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on (starting winning) is up to 4 It is a counter that counts up to times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 has an initial value set to zero. It is incremented by 1 (see S424 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S228 in FIG. 93). The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 has an initial value set to zero. It is incremented by 1 (see S430 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S223 in FIG. 93).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol variation process 8 (S121) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 8 (S121) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the fifth embodiment (and first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). This is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, like the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22). be.

Of the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, in each processing of S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation processing in the fifth embodiment (first embodiment) (see FIG. 22), the same processes as the processes of S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, in the processing of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being varied (S202: No), the number of second special symbol reserved balls The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol reserved Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the ball number counter 203c2 (S223), and set a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 after updating (S224) . The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 29) It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a2 are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S222: No) Next, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (S227).

In the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, is 0) (S227: No), the Since neither the reserved ball of the first special symbol nor the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, it means that the variable display of the special symbols cannot be newly started, and this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 to update (S228), and a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is set ( S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the same manner as the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, and the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 29). It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S901).

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the starting winning process 8 (S122) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This starting winning process 8 (S122) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in place of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). , and is a process for executing corresponding control when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is detected.

In the starting winning process 8 (S122), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, in the process of S421, if it is determined that the first ball entrance 64 has not won (S421: No), or even if the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the process of S423 is performed. , when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by calculation is set (S425).

The special figure 1 pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. , to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S425, the first per random number counter C1 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), the first per type counter C2 and stop Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the process proceeds to S427. to move to. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S427). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (for the lottery of the second special symbol Acquire the number of times of holding the corresponding variable display N2) (S428), and determine whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) ( S429).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by calculation is set (S431).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol of the RAM 223 Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S431, the first per random number counter C1 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), the first per type counter C2 and stop Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. Transition. In the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S433, a prefetching process is executed for prefetching the success or failure from the various counter values acquired based on the start winning (S433), and the present process is terminated. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S433). In this look-ahead processing (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current starting winning processing 8 (see FIG. 94). Then (S1501), if it is determined that no new ball has been detected (S1501: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not (S1502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the number of held balls is less than the upper limit (S1502: No), various counter values (start winning process 8 (Fig. 94 Reference) S426 or various counter values stored in the processing of S432), the success or failure of the lottery in the special design (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and its A variation pattern is predicted (S1503).

By the process of S1503, when the propriety of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the type of stop), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted, next, the predicted propriety of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S1504), and the process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the period until the passing game ball enters one of the ball entrances (the area below the game board 13) is displayed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The period until reaching the point) is relatively long (requires 7 to 8 seconds), and the period until the game ball that has passed through enters one of the ball entrances is relatively short. It is configured to provide two flow paths, namely, the right second flow path, which lasts for about 1 second. By shooting the game ball aiming at the right first flow path in the jackpot, the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is lengthened (that is, until the jackpot ends), as in the fifth embodiment described above. period is longer), the game ball can enter (win) the specific winning hole 65a at a higher rate than when the game ball is shot aiming at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the left.

In addition, when the game ball is launched toward the right second flow path, the possibility of entering the specific winning hole 65a is almost zero, but the ball enters the second ball entering hole 640 for a relatively short period (1 second degree). Therefore, in a high-probability normal pattern state in which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened, game balls are continuously shot toward the right second flow path (66% to 84% By hitting right with firing intensity), it is possible to continuously perform the lottery of the second special symbol without reducing the number of balls held. On the other hand, when hitting left-handed, the possibility of entering the second ball entrance 640 is almost zero, but the ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64 and also into the specific winning hole 65a. It becomes possible to enter the ball. In addition, the area below the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65) is opened in a shorter period (about 1 to 2 seconds) than when the game ball is shot toward the right first flow path. The game ball can reach the provided area). Therefore, a player who wants to finish the big win in a short period of time (want to win many prize balls in a short time) can be made to hit left. In addition, even in the normal state of the normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the game can be played with the aim of entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by striking to the left. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, it is possible to change the path through which the game ball flows down according to the game state, the taste of the player, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of hitting different shooting directions of the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the game ball that flows down the right second flow path is configured to enter either the second ball entry port 640 or the out port 66, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, some of the game balls that have flowed into the right second flow path may be configured to be able to reach the first ball entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65, and the like. Conversely, it may be configured such that some of the game balls that have flowed into the right first flow path can reach the second ball entrance 640 .

In the seventh embodiment, there is a right first passage in which it is easy to enter the specific winning hole 65a and difficult to enter the second ball entering hole 640, and a second hole in which it is difficult to enter the specific winning hole 65a. Although the right second flow path 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, it is not limited to this. For example, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path can enter the first ball entrance 64, and the winning rate to the specific winning opening 65a is lower than when flowing down the right first flow path. It may be configured to be By configuring in this way, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 regardless of whether the game is played with the left hand in the normal state or when the game is played with the right hand aiming at the right second flow path. Since the ball can be entered, the game ball can be shot in the player's favorite shooting direction during the normal game. Further, for example, on the left side of the game board 13, there is a left first channel in which it is easy to enter the specific winning hole 65a and difficult to enter the first ball entering hole 64, and a specific winning channel than the left first channel. A configuration may be adopted in which a left second flow path is provided in which a ball is less likely to enter the opening 65a and a ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance port 64 than the left first flow path.

In the seventh embodiment, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, an effect (see FIG. 91) that suggests to shoot the game ball aiming at the normal ball entrance 67 is executed. However, in addition to this, if the player hits left even though the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (for example, it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 ), it may be configured to execute an effect (warning effect) in a mode of requesting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the normal ball entrance 67 more strongly. Similarly, in the normal state of the normal pattern, it is detected that you are hitting right (for example, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67), so that you are hitting left. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect (warning effect) in a strongly requested mode is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money by continuing the game while the game ball is shot in the wrong direction.

<First Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various modifications of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. First, the first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is lengthened. board. In addition, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, but is less likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, both the game ball that has flowed down the right first channel and the game ball that has flowed down the right second channel are configured to reach the specific winning hole 65a. In addition, although the details will be described later, by continuously hitting the right hand during execution of the jackpot game, the game ball that has flowed down the right first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path It is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. As a result, two game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a during execution of the jackpot game, so that in each round, the maximum number of times the game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is exceeded. can be easily won. More specifically, as described above, in each jackpot round, when the 10th winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. . Under this circumstance, when two game balls reach the specific winning port 65a almost at the same time in a state where nine game balls have already won the specific winning port 65a, the specific winning is detected after the tenth winning is detected. The 11th game ball that reaches almost simultaneously with the 10th game ball can also enter the specific winning hole 65a until the opening 65a is closed. That is, in one round, it is possible to relatively easily obtain 11 prize balls for winning prizes (balls for winning prizes exceeding the specified number of times). Therefore, since it is possible to obtain prize balls exceeding the specifications of the original jackpot of the pachinko machine 10, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a front view of the game board 13 in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 96, in the game board 13 in the first modified example, the right first channel (the channel formed on the rightmost side in the game board 13) includes the detour accessory in the seventh embodiment. Instead of 700, multiple nails are provided. The plurality of nails make it possible to switch the flowing direction of the game ball a plurality of times. On the other hand, in the right second flow path (the flow path formed between the variable display unit 80 and the right first flow path), compared to the right first flow path, the downflow of the game ball is hindered. Fewer structures (to slow down). Therefore, the area below the game board 13 after the game ball is launched (the first ball entrance 64 and the variable The period until reaching the area where the winning device 65 is arranged is shortened. More specifically, the period from when the game ball is shot to when it reaches the variable winning device 65 is 0.00% when it flows down the second flow path than when it flows down the first flow path. About 6 seconds shorter.

Above the right first flow path and the right second flow path, a distribution member 850 that distributes game balls to either the right first flow path or the right second flow path is provided. A game ball shot to the right always reaches this distribution member 850 and is distributed by the distribution member 850 to one of the flow paths (either the right first flow path or the right second flow path). be done. As shown in FIG. 96, the distribution member 850 has two holding portions 850a and 850b that can receive and temporarily hold the game balls that have flowed down. The distribution member 850 is basically in a stationary state with one of the holding portions 850a and 850b facing upward, and a game ball shot by hitting to the right is received by the holding portion facing upward. FIG. 96 illustrates a situation in which a game ball launched by hitting to the right is received in a state where the holding portion 850a is stationary with its upward orientation.

When the game ball is received by one of the holding portions 850a and 850b, gravity due to the weight of the game ball acts on the distribution member 850. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the game ball is received by the holding portion 850a, the distribution member 850 rotates counterclockwise about the rotating shaft 850c, and the holding portion 850b faces upward. In this state, since the holding portion 850a forms an inclination downward to the left, the game ball held by the holding portion 850a falls in the downward left direction in front view. That is, it flows down the right second channel. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the holding portion 850b, the distribution member 850 rotates clockwise about the rotating shaft 850c, and the holding portion 850a faces upward. In this state, the holding portion 850b forms an inclination downward to the lower right, so the game ball held by the holding portion 850b falls in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. That is, it flows down the right first channel. Therefore, each time the distribution member 850 distributes a game ball to one of the channels, a different holding portion faces upward. Therefore, every time a game ball reaches the distribution member 650, the game ball can be alternately distributed to the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

As described above, the period until the ball reaches the variable winning device 65 is shortened by about 0.6 seconds by flowing down the right second flow path rather than flowing down the right first flow path. And, as described above, the shooting interval of the game ball is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, when the player hits to the right continuously, one game ball distributed to the right first flow path and a game ball shot next to the one game ball and distributed to the right second flow path are generated. , reach the variable winning device 65 almost simultaneously, and enter the specific winning opening 65a almost simultaneously. For this reason, in each round of the jackpot, in a state in which nine game balls have already entered the specific winning hole 65a (a state in which the specific winning hole 65a is closed when another winning is detected), the right first flow When two game balls that have flowed down the path and the right second flow path reach the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time, 11 game balls can enter in one round. That is, by simply continuing to hit the right hand continuously, the number of game balls exceeding 10, which is the upper limit number of winning prizes in each round of the jackpot (the number of winning prizes serving as the end condition of the round), can easily enter the specific winning port 65a. It is possible to make a ball (generate a so-called over-winning). Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be further improved.

In addition, in the first modification, the game ball is alternately distributed to the right first flow path and the right second flow path by the distribution member 850 simply by continuing to hit the game ball to the right. It is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the distribution member 850 is deleted and the player himself/herself adjusts the firing intensity to aim for an over-winning. In this case, when the number of winnings for the specific winning opening 65 in each round is 9 (the number of winnings is 1 less than the prescribed number), first, the game ball is aimed at the right first flow path, and then the game ball is shot. By shooting the game balls aiming at the right second flow path, the game balls flowing down the right first flow path and the game balls flowing down the right second flow path reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. be able to. In other words, the eleventh game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period from the detection of the winning of the tenth game ball until the closing of the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, compared to the above-described first modified example, a technique for quickly switching the shooting direction is required, but for a player who accurately switches the shooting direction, it is possible to more reliably generate over-winning. That is, in the above-described first modified example, if the tenth game ball is not distributed to the right first flow path in one round, over-winning does not occur. In other words, depending on the state of the distribution member 850 at the start of the round, it is different whether or not it is easy to over-win. On the other hand, if the distribution member 850 is deleted, a player who has the technique of switching the shooting direction will always place the tenth and eleventh game balls in the right first flow path and the right second flow path. Since it can flow down to the flow path, it is possible to generate an over-winning more reliably.

<Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is lengthened. board. In addition, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, but is less likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, in the second modification, instead of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment, a variable winning device 6500 is used as a variable winning device in which prize balls are awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot. is provided at a position where a left-handed game ball cannot enter. This variable winning device 6500 is configured so that a game ball that has flowed down the right first channel and a game ball that has flowed down the right second channel can enter. The right first flow path is configured to reach the variable winning device 6500 longer than the right second flow path, and while the variable winning device 6500 is open, , the ratio of entering the specific winning hole 6500a is increased. As a result, in the big win, it is possible to realize different game characteristics depending on whether the game ball is shot aiming at the right first flow path or the game ball is shot aiming at the right second flow path. That is, by continuing to shoot the game balls aiming at the right first flow path, the execution period of the jackpot game becomes longer, but the game property is such that waste balls are less likely to occur, while aiming at the right second flow path. By continuing to shoot game balls, the execution period of the jackpot game is shortened, but the playability is such that waste balls may occur.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97 is a front view of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, in the second modification, the variable winning device 65 is removed from the game board 13 (see FIG. 90) in the seventh embodiment, and However, the only differences are that it is connected to the lower area of the game board 13 and that the variable winning device 6500 is provided between the right first channel and the right second channel.

As shown in FIG. 97, the variable winning device 6500 gives a prize ball each time it detects that a game ball enters a specific winning hole 6500a. The variable winning device 6500 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 6500a1 and 6500a2 capable of preventing entry of game balls. These electric accessories 6500a1 and 6500a2 are normally closed so that balls cannot be entered into the specific winning hole 6500a. is released until 10 balls are entered).

Further, as shown in FIG. 97, by opening the electric accessory 6500a1 provided on the right first channel side, the lower end of the guide channel (guide channel 780) inside the detour accessory 700 and the tip of the electric accessory 6500a1 approach. That is, the game ball cannot pass between the guide channel 780 and the electric accessory 6500a1, so that the game ball flowing down the guide channel 780 almost certainly wins the specific winning port 6500a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 6500a2 provided on the right second flow path side is opened, a gap of one game ball or more is left to the left of the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path is guided by the open electric accessory 6500a2 and easily enters the specific winning hole 6500a. There is also a possibility that it will pass through the left side and flow down to the area below the game board 13 (the area in which the first ball entry port 64 and the out port 66 are provided).

Thus, in the second modification of the seventh embodiment, when the game ball is shot toward the right second flow path, the game ball is configured to enter the specific winning hole 6500a. When the game ball is continuously shot toward the right first flow path during the big win, the period until the game ball reaches the variable winning device 6500 is long (the execution period of the big win game is long). Almost all game balls arriving while the specific winning opening 6500a is open are allowed to enter the specific winning opening 6500a. On the other hand, if game balls continue to be shot toward the right second flow path during the jackpot, the period until the game balls reach the variable winning device 6500 is short (the jackpot game can be completed in a short period of time). possible), but there is a risk that some (for example, 1 out of 10) game balls enter the out hole 66 without entering the specific winning hole 6500a. . Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls (game balls that enter the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 6500a) in exchange for a longer jackpot period. A player can choose between a game property that can be played and a game property in which a relatively large number of waste balls are produced in spite of the fact that the big win can be quickly digested.

<Third Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment described above, the detour accessory 700 provided in the right first flow path lengthens the period of passage through the right first flow path. As a result, when the game ball flows down the right first channel, the winning rate for the specific winning hole 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning hole 65a is lengthened.

On the other hand, in the third modification, the detour accessory 700 is deleted in the right first flow path, and the width of the flow path is less than two game balls (that is, the detour accessory 700 is provided The width of the channel was narrower than if the In order to prolong the period in which the game ball flows down the right first flow path, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are arranged in the right first flow path. By narrowing the width of the right first flow path, the ratio of the area of the right first flow path to the board surface area of the game board 13 can be reduced, so the degree of freedom in arranging nails, pinwheels, etc. on the board surface. can increase

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third modified example. As shown in FIG. 98, in the game board 13 according to the third modification, in contrast to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 90), the detour accessory 700 is placed in the right first channel. The difference is that a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided instead, and that the width of the right first flow path is narrowed and the width of the right second flow path is widened.

The rotating bodies 861 to 863 described above will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 98, three rotors 861 to 863 are provided in the right first channel. The operations of these three rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be described by taking the rotating body 861 as an example. As shown in FIG. 98, the rotating body 861 is configured in a substantially crescent shape in which a part of a circular shape is hollowed out, and can rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft 861b. configured as possible. In addition, the rotating body 861 is provided with a ball stopping portion 861a capable of receiving only one game ball that has flowed down. In a state in which the ball stopper portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 861 is received by the ball stopper portion 861a. Since the ball stopper 861a rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 861, the game ball received by the ball stopper 861a also rotates about the rotation shaft 861b. When the ball stop portion 861a faces the downstream side of the right first flow path, the game ball falls to the downstream side of the right first flow path due to gravity acting on the game ball.

On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the rotating body 861 in a state in which the ball stop portion 861a is not facing the upstream direction in the right first flow path, the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body 861 contacts the upstream side. state. The state in which the game ball is in contact with the outer peripheral portion continues until the ball stopping portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path due to the rotation of the rotating body 861. When the ball stopper portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path, the game ball flows down to the ball stopper portion 861a, and thereafter, as described above, the rotating shaft rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 861. After rotating around 861b as the rotation axis, it drops downstream in the right first channel.

Thus, by providing the rotating bodies 861 to 863 for the right first flow path, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down every time it reaches each rotating body. The game ball performs a plurality of actions such as temporarily stopping the game ball that has reached each rotating body, receiving the game ball on the ball stopper part, and performing a rotating motion about the rotating shaft in conjunction with the rotating motion of the rotating body. can be done. Therefore, compared with the case within which the rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided, it is possible to lengthen the period required for the game ball that has reached the right first flow path to flow down the right first flow path. Therefore, the period until the game ball shot toward the right first flow path reaches the lower area on the game board 13 can be lengthened as compared with the game ball shot by left hitting.

As described above, in the third modification of the seventh embodiment, instead of the detour accessory 700, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 requiring a relatively small installation area are arranged in the right first flow path. there is Then, the rotating bodies 861 to 863 reduce the flow speed of the game ball (prevent the flow down) until the game ball shot toward the right first flow path reaches the lower area on the game board 13. The period between the two is set to be longer than the period until the game ball shot by hitting to the left reaches the lower area. As a result, it is possible to reduce the area occupied by the right first flow path while realizing the same playability as in the above-described seventh embodiment, thereby further improving the degree of freedom in board configuration.

In the third modification of the seventh embodiment, three rotors are provided for the right first flow path, but the number and arrangement of the rotors are changed according to the third modification. It is not limited and can be set arbitrarily.

As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily conjectured that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible.

In the above fifth to seventh embodiments and their modifications, the channel having the detour accessory 700 is arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, but the board configuration can be changed arbitrarily. can do. For example, the detour accessory 700 may be arranged on the left side of the variable display device unit 890 .

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and their modifications, the guide channels 740 to 790 of the detour accessory 700 are configured to protrude forward from the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is not limited to this. For example, the detour accessories 700 may be arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 . That is, by arranging the detour accessory 700 on the back side of the base plate 60 and forming at least the front side of the detour accessory 700 of the base plate 60 with a transparent material, it is possible to visually see how the game balls flow down. do. Then, of the base plate 60, the upstream side of the detour accessory 700 (the position where the game ball that has progressed to the back side of the base plate 60 can flow into the opening 710) and the downstream side (outflow from the opening 720) At a position where the played game ball can flow out to the front side of the base plate 60, an opening penetrating the base plate 60 and having a size through which the game ball can pass may be provided. By configuring in this way, a nail, a pinwheel, or the like can be arranged on the front side of the detour accessory 700 in the base plate 60 . That is, the board surface of the game board 13 can be effectively utilized.

In each of the above-described embodiments, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the validity and the look-ahead result (variation type) of the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of these, or in addition, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the jackpot type. By constructing in this way, the type of jackpot in the case of a big win can be predicted from the presence/absence of execution of the continuous notice performance and the performance type of the notice performance, so that the player's interest in the continuous notice performance can be improved. can be done.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the higher the degree of expectation of the lottery results, the more likely it is that the continuous announcement effect will be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the continuous announcement effect is more likely to be executed for a lottery result with a lower degree of expectation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation that the continuous announcement effect will not be executed. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the variable display accompanied by the notice effect is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. It is not necessary to execute the forewarning effect over the variable display. For example, at the start of each variable display in which a continuous advance notice effect is set, a lottery may be made as to whether or not to set the notice effect. In this case, the higher the expectation of the winning information that triggered the setting of the continuous advance notice effect, the higher the lottery probability of setting the advance notice effect in each variable display. By configuring in this way, the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be heightened as the advance notice effect continues, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data (first form), points (second embodiment), the value of the high-expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment), and other data indicating the contents of the pending lottery results. However, it is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a are discriminated one by one. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, only when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data (first embodiment), the points (second embodiment), the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment) form), etc., based on the data indicating the contents of the pending lottery results, it was configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, but it is not limited to this, and the continuous announcement effect that is normally executed is executed. Part or all of the determination of acceptance may also be made based on the data indicating the content of the pending lottery result. Conversely, in a state other than the advance notice lottery prohibited state (normal state), it is always determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed based only on the lottery result notified by the winning information command (random number range command). may be

In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, but the setting timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. may be determined. Specifically, for example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set only when it is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect that will eventually result in a big win. That is, it may be configured such that the continuous advance notice effect can be overwritten during execution of the continuous advance notice effect that results in a loss. By configuring in this way, the frequency of execution of the continuous announcement effect can be increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, for example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of the jackpot, or the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of the variable probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. good too. Further, for example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the advance lottery prohibition state by lottery each time the fluctuation start timing is reached. A configuration may be adopted in which setting and cancellation of the advance notice lottery prohibition state are switched according to the operation content. Similarly, the timing at which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled is not limited to the timing at which one normal variable display ends after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, and may be determined arbitrarily. For example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may not be canceled until the five times of fluctuation display is finished after the continuous notice effect is finished, or conversely, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled when the continuous notice effect is finished. You may Alternatively, it may be canceled at a predetermined timing during execution of the continuous advance notice effect, or may be canceled regardless of the continuous notice effect. For example, it may be configured to be canceled based on the end of a big hit, a probability variable state, a time saving state, etc., and while the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set, whether to cancel by lottery each time the variable display is executed It is good also as a structure which discriminate|determines. Also, it may be configured to be releasable based on the player's operation. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide the advance notice lottery prohibition state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, based on the starting winning command (random number range command) output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, the main control device 110 may determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, and notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the determination result. In this case, the information indicating whether or not it is a variation pattern in which the continuous advance notice effect is set may be included in the variation pattern command and transmitted, or may be transmitted as a separate command. Alternatively, only the fact that execution of the continuous advance notice performance is determined is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the period during which the continuous advance notice production continues may be grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 side. .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is configured to be set only during the period from when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined until the end of one variable display after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. , but not limited to these. For example, even when a jackpot is won, the configuration may be such that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, and data (logical sum data (first embodiment)) indicating the lottery result (variation type) of each ball held at that time (logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment) or the value of the high expectation level type flag 223n (third embodiment)). Here, during the big win, the player shoots the ball aiming at the specific winning hole 65a. There is a high possibility that multiple balls will enter inside. That is, there is a high possibility that a plurality of held balls will increase during the period from the start of the big win to the end of the big win. Under this circumstance, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed each time the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64 that occurred during the big win is detected, the starting winning corresponding to the variation type with the low degree of expectation will be performed first. After the continuous advance notice performance is determined based on and the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set, there is a possibility that the start prize corresponding to the highly anticipated variation type will occur. In other words, despite the presence of the ball on hold corresponding to the variation type with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the variation display based on the variation type with a high degree of expectation. There is a risk of it disappearing. On the other hand, during the big win, the notice lottery prohibition state is set, and when the big win ends, the notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, and the continuous notice effect is performed based on the lottery result of each reserved ball held at that time. If it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the retained ball of the variation type with the highest degree of expectation among the retained balls retained at the end of the jackpot. can. Therefore, it is possible to set the continuous advance notice effect more appropriately.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed is performed according to the variation type of the plurality of reserved balls. is not limited to the determination of For example, the technology of each of the above-described embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the mode of reserved symbols to a mode different from normal (so-called gaming machine equipped with a pending notice effect). . That is, the prohibition state in which changing the mode of the pending symbol is prohibited is set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when execution of the pending advance notice effect is determined or when the jackpot is started), When the prohibition state is lifted, the variation type of the multiple suspended balls that are on hold at the time of the release is determined, and with the lottery probability according to the variation type with the highest degree of expectation, whether or not the suspension notice can be executed, and It may be configured to determine the mode of the pending symbol in the case of executing the pending notice. In addition, the technique of each of the embodiments described above is not limited to the case of determining the variation type of the reserved ball in order to execute a continuous advance notice effect, a reserved notice effect, or the like. The technique of each of the above embodiments can be applied when performing some kind of determination on a plurality of held balls.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed according to the variation type of the plurality of reserved balls, but this is not the only option. . For example, without setting the advance notice lottery prohibition state, each time the start winning is detected, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed according to the variation type of each reserved ball held at that time (continuous notice effect is being executed If so, it may be configured to execute the determination of whether or not to extend the continuous announcement effect). By configuring in this way, there is no need to change the control depending on whether or not the advance notice lottery is prohibited, so the description content of the control program can be simplified. Therefore, the development load on the developer can be reduced.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined. More specifically, for example, the range of values to which various counter values (random values) belong in the second embodiment is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 side: A series of controls for performing look-ahead processing based on the range of values to which various counter values (random numbers) belong may be applied to the first embodiment and the third embodiment.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (read ahead all pending when pre-read prohibited state is canceled)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control relating to a game, and sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means has a discrimination condition. Determination means for performing determination based on establishment, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means, and said determination means. a first output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating a determination result by the sub-control means to the slave control means; a determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used for determination by the determination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; is signal receiving means configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means; Based on the reception of the result signal, the determination information signal is received by the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal, and the signal receiving means. Based on this, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information at least until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. specific determining means capable of executing a specific determination based on information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals stored in the information storage means when a specific condition is established; and determination by the specific determining means. a second effect execution means for executing the second effect over the execution period of one or more of the first effects executed after the determination based on the second determination result in A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising:

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a player is awarded a big winning game. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, by executing the same system of effects (executing a so-called continuous advance notice effect) over the execution period of a plurality of variable displays, There are also those that can keep the player's sense of anticipation sustained over the duration of the variable display that is performed.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous announcement effect, there was a case where the execution determination of the continuous announcement effect was won again, and the continuous announcement effect was executed redundantly. In this case, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous announcement effect should have a sense of anticipation.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the main control means determines the first determination result by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, the privilege game execution means gives the player a An advantageous privilege game is executed. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is first generated before the discrimination condition is established. 2 output means to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the signal receiving means receives the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first effect executing means executes the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, at least the discrimination result signal corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit. is stored by the information storage means until Triggered by the establishment of the specific condition, the specific determination means executes a specific determination based on the information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals stored in the information storage means, and the determination by the specific determination means produces a second determination result. Based on that, the second effect executing means executes the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects to be executed after the determination.

Thereby, the second effect can be executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects, so that the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, upon receipt of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, it is determined whether or not to execute the second effect based on information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal. A game machine A2 characterized by comprising a discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means triggers the second effect based on the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal. Since it is determined whether or not to be executed by the receiving time determination means, the chances of executing the second effect can be increased, so that there is an effect that the effect can be diversified.

In the gaming machine A2, the second effect execution means executes the first effect corresponding to the determination information signal that triggered the determination when the reception determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the second effect is executed over a plurality of execution periods of the first effect including at least a.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, when it is determined that the second performance is to be executed by the determination means at the time of reception, the first performance corresponding to the determination information signal that triggered the determination is performed. Since the second effect execution means executes the second effect over at least the execution period of the plurality of first effects, there is an effect that the effect can be diversified.

In the game machine A2 or A3, a restriction state setting means for setting a determination restriction state in which determination by the determination unit at reception is restricted based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition; is set, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the predetermined cancellation condition. A game machine A4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a determination restriction state in which determination by the reception determination means is restricted is set by the restriction state setting means on the basis of establishment of a predetermined setting condition. When the determination restricted state is set by the restriction state setting means, the determination restriction state is released by the release means based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. A specific condition is met when a predetermined cancellation condition is met.

Thus, when the discrimination restriction state is canceled, the discrimination by the specific discrimination means can be executed based on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination result signals already stored in the information storage means. can be determined based on information corresponding to more determination result signals.

In the game machine A4, the restriction state setting means sets the determination restriction state based on the fact that the reception determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. .

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means based on the fact that the reception time determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress redundant determination of the execution of the second effect by the receiving time determination means during the execution of the second effect.

In the gaming machine A5, the predetermined release condition is established based on execution of at least one of the first effects after the end of the second effects.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied based on the execution of at least one first effect after the second effect is completed, so the second effect and when at least one first effect is being executed after the second effect is finished, it is possible to limit the determination of whether to execute the second effect. Therefore, after the end of the second effect, the first effect without the second effect can be executed at least once before the next start of the second effect. It is possible to make the player easily understand whether the performance has continued up to the first performance. Therefore, there is an effect that a more comprehensible presentation can be realized.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the specific determination means includes information corresponding to the first determination result in the information corresponding to the determination information signal stored in the information storage means. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the ratio of the second determination result is higher when the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included than when the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is included in the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means. Since the determination by the specific determination means is performed so that the ratio of the second determination result is higher when the information corresponding to the first determination result is included than when the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included, When the second effect is executed, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the privilege game will be executed.

<Characteristics B group> (Distinguish the pending fluctuation type from the OR data of each pending area)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control relating to a game, and sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means has a discrimination condition. Determination means for performing determination based on establishment, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means, and said determination means. a first output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating a determination result by the sub-control means to the slave control means; a determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used for determination by the determination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; is signal receiving means configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means; Based on the reception of the result signal, the determination information signal is received by the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal, and the signal receiving means. Based on this, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information at least until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. and calculation data calculation means for calculating predetermined calculation data by performing a predetermined calculation on information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means when a specific condition is established. a second effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second effect based on the predetermined operation data calculated by the operation data calculating means; a second performance executing means for executing the second performance over the execution period of one or more of the first performances to be executed after the determination based on the fact that the performance is determined to be executed. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, by executing the same system of effects (executing a so-called continuous advance notice effect) over the execution period of a plurality of variable displays, There are also those that can keep the player's sense of anticipation sustained over the duration of the variable display that is performed.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous advance notice effect, there is a case where the execution determination of the continuous notice effect is won again, and the continuous notice effect is executed redundantly. In this case, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous announcement effect should have a sense of anticipation. In order to solve this problem, it is conceivable to limit the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect until the end of the continuous notice effect when one continuous notice effect is determined. In this case, since it is not possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect for the reserved ball based on the starting prize detected during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the next continuous notice effect is executed after the first continuous notice effect is completed. In some cases, there was a relatively long period of time before it was completed. Furthermore, a method of determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect after the end of the continuous notice effect based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls held during the continuous notice effect is also conceivable. Since it is necessary to discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball, there is a problem that the processing load increases compared to the determination of whether or not the execution of the normal continuous announcement effect is possible.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means. . A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is output by the second output means to satisfy the discrimination condition. is output to the slave control means before. In the slave control means, the signal receiving means receives the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means. Based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first effect execution means executes the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, at least the discrimination result signal corresponding to the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit. is stored by the information storage means. Triggered by the establishment of the specific condition, the calculation data calculation means performs a predetermined calculation on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means to calculate predetermined calculation data. Based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, it is determined whether or not to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determination means. Based on the determination by the second performance execution determination means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance execution means performs the execution period of one or more first performances to be executed after the determination. A second effect is executed.

Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data obtained as a result of performing the predetermined calculation on the information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals. All the information stored in is discriminated one by one, and the processing load of the slave control means is reduced compared to the case of executing the discrimination whether to execute the second performance based on each discrimination result. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine B1, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, a predetermined identification is included in the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals that are the target of the predetermined calculation. information determining means for determining whether or not information corresponding to the determination information is included, and the second effect execution determining means determines that the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included by the information determining means. A game machine B2 characterized in that, when it is determined, it is determined whether or not to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculating means, the information corresponding to the predetermined specific discrimination information among the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals subjected to the predetermined calculation. is included is discriminated by the information discriminating means. When the information determination means determines that the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included, the second effect execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the second effect based on predetermined calculation data.

As a result, it is possible to limit the opportunity for executing the determination by the second effect execution determining means to the case where the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included, so that the frequency of determination processing can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2, the types of the predetermined specific discrimination information include first discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result and second discrimination information corresponding to the discrimination result different from the first discrimination result. At least discrimination information is provided, and the second effect execution discrimination means determines that the first discrimination information is included rather than the information discrimination means discriminating that the second discrimination information is included. The game machine B3 is characterized in that it is determined that the second effect is executed at a higher rate when it is determined that it is included.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as types of predetermined specific discrimination information, at least first discrimination information corresponding to a first discrimination result and second discrimination information corresponding to a discrimination result different from the first discrimination result are provided. ing. When the information determining means determines that the first determination information is included than when the information determination means determines that the second determination information is included, the second effect execution determination means determines that the second effect execution determination means has a higher rate. It is determined that the performance is executed.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can expect that the privilege game will be executed as the result of the first determination when the second effect is executed.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the main control means specifies the result of determination by the determination means before the determination condition is established based on the determination information being acquired by the determination information acquisition means. and a discrimination information signal generating means for generating the discrimination information signal by including at least information corresponding to the discrimination result specified by the prior specifying means, wherein the information storage means The slave control means comprises at least the predetermined number of pieces of information, each of which is composed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of a plurality of determination results that can be specified by the specifying means. Bit setting for setting a bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to a specific state in one storage area provided in the information storage means based on the reception of the discrimination information signal. wherein the calculation data calculation means calculates, as the predetermined calculation, a logical sum of information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means as the predetermined calculation data. , wherein the information determining means determines that information corresponding to specific determination information is included when a specific bit of the logical sum is in the specific state. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, based on the acquisition of the discrimination information by the discrimination information acquisition means, the determination result by the discrimination means is specified by the pre-specifying means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. A discrimination information signal containing at least information corresponding to the discrimination result specified by the advance specifying means is generated by the discrimination information signal generating means. At least a predetermined number of pieces of information are provided in the information storage means, each having a storage area composed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of the plurality of determination results that can be specified by the advance specifying means. In the slave control means, the bit corresponding to the determination result indicated by the determination information signal is set in one storage area provided in the information storage means based on the reception of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means. It is set to a specific state by means. As the predetermined calculation, the logical sum of information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means is calculated as predetermined calculation data by the calculation data calculation means. When the specific bit of the logical sum is in a specific state, the information decision means decides that the information corresponding to the specific decision information is included.

As a result, it is possible to obtain a result equivalent to the determination of all the information used in the operation of the OR only by determining the state of a specific bit of the OR, thus reducing the processing load on the slave control means. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

The game machine B5 in the gaming machine B4, wherein the bit setting means sets a bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to an ON state and sets other bits to an OFF state. .

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal is set to the ON state by the bit setting means, while the other bits are set to the OFF state. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination by the second effect execution determination means can be accurately executed.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, a plurality of types having different priorities to be subjected to determination by the second effect execution determination means are set as the type of the specific determination information, and the information determination means determines the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority among the bits in the specific state, and the second effect execution determining means determines the bit determined by the determining means A game machine B6 characterized in that it is determined whether to execute the second effect at a determination ratio corresponding to .

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4 or B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of types with different priorities to be determined by the second effect execution determining means are set as the types of specific determination results. Among the bits in the specific state, the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority is discriminated by the information discriminating means. Whether or not to execute the second effect is determined by the second effect execution determination means at a determination ratio corresponding to the bit determined by the determination means.

As a result, it is possible to vary the ratio of execution of the second effect according to the result of determination by the determining means specified by the advance specifying means, so that the result of determination by the second effect determining means is used to execute the second effect. There is an effect that the player can guess from the presence or absence.

In the gaming machine B6, when determining the specific bit, the information determination means determines whether the specific state is in order from the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority in descending order of the priority. The slave control means is characterized in that it comprises a determination aborting means for terminating determination by the information determining means when the information determining means determines that the specific state is established. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific bit is discriminated by the information discriminating means, it is discriminated whether or not the bit is in a specific state in descending order of priority from the bit corresponding to the discrimination result with the highest priority. In the slave control means, the discrimination by the information discriminating means is terminated by the discrimination aborting means when the information discriminating means discriminates that the information discriminating means is in the specific state.

As a result, the discrimination process can be terminated without discriminating all of the bits that constitute the specific bit, so there is an effect that the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

<Characteristics C group> (Specific information indicating pending content is updated in the sub, and it is determined whether continuous notice can be executed based on the specific information)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control relating to a game, and sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means has a discrimination condition. Determination means for performing determination based on establishment, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means, and said determination means. a first output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating a determination result by the sub-control means to the slave control means; a determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used for determination by the determination means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; is signal receiving means configured to receive at least the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means; Based on the reception of the result signal, a first effect executing means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the determination result signal, a specific information storage means for storing specific information, and the signal receiving means. discrimination result specifying means for specifying a discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal based on the reception of the discrimination information signal; and based on the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means information update means capable of updating the specific information; second effect execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the second effect based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means; Based on the determination by the performance execution determination means that the second performance is to be executed, the second performance is executed over the execution period of one or more of the first performances executed after the determination. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising: a second effect executing means for

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a player is awarded a big winning game. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, by executing the same system of effects (executing a so-called continuous advance notice effect) over the execution period of a plurality of variable displays, There are also those that can keep the player's sense of anticipation sustained over the duration of the variable display that is performed.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous announcement effect, there was a case where the execution determination of the continuous announcement effect was won again, and the continuous announcement effect was executed redundantly. In this case, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous announcement effect should have a sense of anticipation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means. . A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is output by the second output means to satisfy the discrimination condition. is output to the slave control means before. In the slave control means, the signal receiving means receives the determination result signal output by the first output means and the determination information signal output by the second output means. Based on the fact that the determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, the first effect execution means executes the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the determination result signal. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, and the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means. based on, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated by the information updating means. Based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, it is determined by the second performance execution determining means whether the second performance is to be executed, and it is determined by the second performance execution determining means to execute the second performance. , the second effect execution means executes the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects to be executed after the determination.

Thereby, the second effect can be executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects, so that the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, when the determination result is specified by the determination result specification means, reception determination means determines whether to execute the second effect based on the specified determination result; A game machine C2 characterized by comprising a switching means for switching whether the determination of whether to execute the second effect is performed by the second effect execution determination means or by the reception determination means.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the discrimination result is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, it is determined by the reception discrimination means whether to execute the second effect based on the specified discrimination result. The switching means switches whether the determination of whether or not to execute the second effect is performed by the second effect execution means or by the reception determination means.

As a result, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in determining whether or not to execute the second effect can be increased.

In the game machine C2, a restriction state setting means for setting a determination restriction state in which determination by the reception determination means is restricted based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means. a release means for releasing the discrimination restriction state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined release condition when the determination is made, and the switching means performs the second effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined release condition. is performed by the second effect execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the restriction state setting means sets a determination restriction state in which determination by the reception determination means is restricted based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means, The determination restricting state is canceled by the canceling means when a predetermined canceling condition is established. Based on the establishment of a predetermined cancellation condition, the switching means performs switching so that the determination as to whether or not to execute the second effect is performed by the second effect execution determining means.

Thus, when the determination restricted state is released, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the second performance by the second performance execution determining means based on the specific information updated during the determination restricted state. There is an effect that the determination by the second effect execution determination means can be performed by taking into consideration the determination result corresponding to the determination information signal received during the determination limited state.

In the game machine C3, the switching means determines whether or not to execute the second effect based on the fact that the second effect execution determining means has determined whether to execute the second effect. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the switching is performed by the discrimination means.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, it is determined whether or not to execute the second effect based on the fact that the second effect execution determination means has determined whether or not to execute the second effect. is performed by the reception determination means by the switching means.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specific information is updated by the information updating means during the period from when the determination restricted state is canceled by the release means until the determination restricted state is set by the restriction state setting means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by comprising an update avoiding means for avoiding the update.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the information is updated during the period from when the determination restriction state is canceled by the release means until the determination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means. Since the updating of the specific information by the means is avoided by the update avoiding means, useless updating of the specific information is suppressed in a period when the determination using the specific information by the second effect execution means is difficult to execute. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the sub-control means includes defined information storage means for storing defined information defined by associating numerical data with each determination result that can be specified by the determination result specifying means. The information updating means performs a predetermined calculation using the numerical data defined in the stipulation information in association with the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means, whereby the specifying information A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it updates the

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the regulation information storage means stores regulation information defined by associating numerical data with each discrimination result that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means. The specific information is updated by performing a predetermined calculation by the information updating means using the numerical data defined in association with the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means.

As a result, the specific information can be updated by a simple process of reading numerical data defined for each determination result and performing a predetermined calculation, so that the processing load when updating the specific information can be reduced. There is

In any one of game machines C1 to C5, the specific information storage means stores, as the specific information, information indicating one discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means, and the slave control means and the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly specified by the discrimination result specifying means is determined based on the priority predetermined for each discrimination result that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means. priority determination means for determining whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the information storage means; When it is determined that the priority corresponding to the determination result specified in the above is higher, the specific information is updated to information indicating the newly specified determination result. Gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the specific information, information indicating one determination result specified by the determination result specifying means is stored in the specific information storage means. In the slave control means, the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly specified by the discrimination result specifying means is stored in the specified information storage based on the priority determined in advance for each discrimination result that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means. The priority determination means determines whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the means. When the priority determining means determines that the priority corresponding to the newly specified determination result is higher, the information updating means updates the specific information to information indicating the newly specified determination result. be.

As a result, even when the discrimination information signal is output a plurality of times, the specific information storage means stores the discrimination result having the highest priority among the plurality of discrimination results notified by the discrimination information signal a plurality of times. Since only the information indicating the result can be stored, there is an effect that whether or not to execute the second effect can be executed based on the discrimination information with the highest priority.

In the gaming machine C7, the secondary control means, based on the update of the specific information by the information updating means, waits until the determination by the determination means that becomes the newly specified determination result is executed. and a performance number information storage means for storing performance number information corresponding to the number of times of the first performance specified by the number of times specifying means. The second effect executing means executes the second effect over the execution period of the first effect the number of times indicated by the effect frequency information stored in the effect frequency information storage means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, based on the update of the specific information by the information update means, the first effect is executed until the determination by the determination means that results in a newly specified determination result is executed. The number of times is specified by the number of times specifying means. Effect frequency information corresponding to the number of times of the first effect specified by the frequency specifying means is stored by the effect frequency information storage means. The second effect execution means executes the second effect over the execution period of the first effect the number of times indicated by the effect frequency information stored in the effect frequency information storage means.

Thus, when it is determined by the second effect execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the execution period of the first effect the number of times indicated by the effect frequency information stored in the effect frequency information storage means is changed to that of the second effect. Since the second effect can be executed by a simple control of setting the execution period, there is an effect that the processing load in executing the second effect can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C8, the slave control means reduces the number of presentation information stored in the number of presentation information storage means by one based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. The game machine C9 is characterized by comprising performance frequency information updating means for updating to the corresponding performance frequency information.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the number of presentation information stored in the number of presentation information storage means is changed in the slave control means based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. , the performance frequency information corresponding to the number of times less by one is updated by the performance frequency information update means, so that the second performance is continued until the execution period of the first performance corresponding to the discrimination information with the highest priority. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature D group> (The range of random numbers obtained at the time of starting winning is sent to the sub as winning information)
In a gaming machine comprising main control means for executing main control related to a game, and sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means controls a game within a predetermined range. judgment value generation means capable of updating and generating a judgment value; judgment value acquisition means for acquiring the judgment value generated by the judgment value generation means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; determination means for determining whether the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means matches a predetermined specific value; and a control process executing means for executing the process set by the control process, and based on the determination value being acquired by the determination value acquisition means, among a plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality of subranges, currently acquired a small range specifying means for specifying which of the small ranges the determined value belongs to; and a small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means to the slave control means. and signal output means, wherein the slave control means includes signal reception means for receiving the small-range signal output by the signal output means, and triggered by reception of the small-range signal by the signal reception means , and discrimination result specifying means for specifying the discrimination result by the discrimination means based on the small range indicated by the small range signal.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, the determination value generated within the predetermined range by the determination value generation means is obtained by the determination value acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition. The determining means determines whether or not the determination value acquired by the determination value acquiring means matches a predetermined specific value. When the determination means determines that the value matches the specific value, the control process execution means executes the process set corresponding to the specific value. Based on the acquisition of the judgment value by the judgment value acquisition means, the small range is identified to which of a plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into which the judgment value acquired this time belongs. Identified by means. A small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means is output to the slave control means by the signal output means. In the slave control means, the small range signal output by the signal output means is received by the signal receiving means. The discrimination result by the discriminating means is specified by the discrimination result specifying means based on.

As a result, there is an effect that the determination result by the determination means can be suitably determined in the slave control means.

In the gaming machine D1, the sub-control means stores regulation information storage means for storing regulation information defining a correspondence relationship between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the determination result of the discrimination means. The discrimination result specifying means specifies the discrimination result by the discrimination means based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the prescribed information stored in the prescribed information storage means. A gaming machine D2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the regulation information storage means stores regulation information that defines the correspondence relationship between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the determination result by the discrimination means. Based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the stipulation information stored in the stipulation information storage means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means is specified by the discrimination result specifying means.

Accordingly, there is an effect that the determination result can be easily identified based on the correspondence defined in the defined information.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific value includes a plurality of types including at least one or more values set as a first specific value and one or more values set as a second specific value. is provided, and the control processing execution means executes a first process when the determination value matches the first specific value, and the determination value matches the second specific value A gaming machine D3 characterized in that a second process different from the first process is executed when the game is executed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific value is provided with a plurality of types including at least one or more values set as the first specific value and one or more values set as the second specific value. When the determination value matches the first specific value, the control process execution means executes the first process, while when the determination value matches the second specific value, the control process execution means performs a second process different from the first process.

As a result, there is an effect that various processes can be executed according to the type of the specific value with which the judgment value matches.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that in the game machine D3, of the small ranges, the small ranges containing the specific values are composed only of the specific values of the same type.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the small range containing the specific values is composed only of the specific values of the same type. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a range or a small range in which a specific value and a value different from the specific value coexist. Therefore, since the small range and the determination result by the determination means can be made to correspond one-to-one, there is an effect that the determination by the determination result specification means can be executed under conditions closer to the determination by the determination means.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the main control means stores the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means at least until a determination condition for performing determination by the determination means is satisfied. A gaming machine D5 comprising storage means, wherein said signal output means is capable of outputting said small range signal to said sub-control means before said determination condition is established.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means is stored at least by the judgment value storage means until the judgment condition for executing the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied. Before the determination condition is established, the signal output means outputs the small range signal to the slave control means.

Accordingly, there is an effect that the determination result by the determination means can be specified in the slave control means before the determination condition is established.

In the game machine D5, the main control means comprises a discrimination result signal output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the sub control means receives the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means. a first effect executing means for executing a first effect indicating the determination result notified by the received determination result signal based on the determination result; and based on the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means. , a second effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect, and a determination result that is the object of the determination based on the fact that the second effect execution determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed. and a second effect execution means for executing the second effect over a plurality of execution periods of the first effect including at least the first effect indicating .

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means is output by the discrimination result signal output means. Further, in the sub-control means, when the determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, the first effect indicating the determination result notified by the received determination result signal is executed by the first effect executing means. be done. Based on the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, it is determined by the second effect execution determination means whether to execute the second effect. Based on the determination by the second effect execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect is executed over the execution period of a plurality of first effects including at least the first effect indicating the determination result that is the object of the determination. A second effect is executed by the second effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the gaming machine D6, the secondary control means enters a determination restriction state in which determination by the second effect execution determination means is restricted based on the fact that the second effect execution determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. and a release means for canceling the discrimination restricted state based on execution of at least one first effect after execution of the second effect is completed. A gaming machine D7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the subordinate control means, the determination restriction state in which determination by the second effect execution determination means is restricted is set by the determination restriction state setting means based on the fact that the second effect execution determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. set. After the execution of the second performance is finished, the determination restricted state is released by the releasing means based on the execution of at least one first performance.

As a result, when at least one first effect is being executed during execution of the second effect and after the end of the second effect, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being newly executed. Therefore, at least one first effect without the second effect can be executed from the end of the second effect to the start of the next second effect. Therefore, the player can easily understand the timing at which the second effect is finished, so that there is an effect that a more comprehensible effect can be realized.

In the gaming machine D7, the secondary control means includes determination result information storage means capable of storing determination result information indicating the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means up to a predetermined number of information, and the releasing means. a release time determination means for determining whether or not to execute the second effect based on a plurality of the determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means when the determination restriction state is canceled by Cancellation of executing the second performance over the execution period of one or more of the first performances executed after the determination based on the fact that the second performance is determined to be executed by the determination means at the time of cancellation. A game machine D8 characterized by comprising: time execution means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the discrimination result information indicating the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means is stored by the discrimination result information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. When the determination restricted state is released by the release means, whether or not to execute the second performance is determined by the determination means at the time of release based on a plurality of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means. Based on the fact that the release determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed, the release time execution means performs the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects to be executed after the determination. executed.

As a result, when the determination restriction state is canceled, execution of the second effect can be set without waiting until the small range signal is newly output from the main control means. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the second effect by taking into account the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means based on the small range signal output during the discrimination restricted state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the second effect more preferably.

<Characteristic group E> (Make the period until the ball hit right-handed reaches the attacker longer than when the ball is hit left-handed)
A first flow path through which a game ball shot in a first direction can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction can flow, and the first flow path. and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path is provided at a position where at least the game ball can enter; wherein the second flow path is launched in the second direction before the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that it is constructed so that the period until the game ball that is hit reaches the ball-entering means is longer.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening is a winning, the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times to shift to a winning state. there is something In such a conventional type gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is entered into the big winning opening during the winning state, so that the player can enjoy the winning state as one of the pleasures of the game. can let

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to make the game ball enter the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, so the game during the win state becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it becomes

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, a game ball shot in a first direction flows down the first flow path, and a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction flows down the second flow path. flow down A ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a game ball that has flowed down through the first channel and a game ball that has flowed down through the second channel can enter. A predetermined privilege is imparted by a privilege imparting means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means. Secondly, the period until the game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entering means is longer than the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. A flow path is configured.

As a result, the game ball can be shot aiming at the first flow path for the player who wants the game ball to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible, while the game ball can be shot for a relatively long time. A game ball can be shot aiming at the second flow path for a player who wants to reach the ball-entering means. Therefore, since each player can select his or her favorite firing direction to play the game, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine E1, the ball-entering means is positioned at a position where the rate of game balls that have flowed down the second flow path are higher than the rate of game balls that have flowed down the first flow path. A game machine E2 characterized in that it is arranged in the .

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the rate at which the game balls that have flowed down the second channel enter is higher than the rate at which game balls that have flowed down the first channel enter. Since the ball-entering means is arranged at a higher position, when the ball flows down the first flow path, the period until it reaches the ball-entering means is shortened, but it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the ball-entering means. On the other hand, when the ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering means, but it takes longer to reach the ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself/herself can select a shooting direction suitable for each player's taste.

A gaming machine E3, which is one of the gaming machines E1 or E2, further comprising deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the speed of the game balls flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the decelerating means, so that the game balls launched in the second direction enter. There is an effect that the period until reaching the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the entering ball means more reliably.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, it is variable between a first position where the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. variable means, determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, the variable means performs a predetermined number of times from the second position to the and variable game executing means for executing a variable game variable to the first position.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is varied between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition. A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of a specific determination result in determination by the determination means.

In the gaming machine E4, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a specific shooting interval; A first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of game balls entering the ball entry means after being varied from the position to the first position. and control means, during execution of the variable game, based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is changed to the first position. and a second variable control means for varying between two positions, wherein the specific period is after the game ball is started to be shot in the second direction, and is shot in the second direction at the specific shooting interval. The game machine E5 is characterized in that the period is at least longer than the period until the specified number of game balls finish flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a specific shooting interval. During the execution of the variable game, based on the fact that game balls of a predetermined specific number or more enter the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means moves to the first position. 1 is changed to the second position by the variable control means. During execution of the variable game, the variable means is variable to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position. be done. At least a specific period of time from the start of shooting game balls in the second direction until the specified number of game balls shot in the second direction at specific shooting intervals finish flowing down the second flow path. is configured to be longer.

Thereby, when the game balls are shot in the second direction during execution of the variable game, the game balls of the specific number can be entered into the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that a person loses.

In the gaming machine E4, the variable game executing means is triggered by the establishment of a specific condition during execution of the variable game, and the predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position. The variable means is controlled to vary with a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation that is changed to the second position after the elapse, and one or more of the specific variable patterns During the execution period of the first variable operation, the game ball launched in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can reach, and the specific variable pattern is started after the first A game machine E6 is characterized in that it is difficult for game balls shot in two directions to reach.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific condition is established during the execution of the variable game, the variable means is varied to the first position, and after a predetermined first period elapses, the first variable is varied to the second position. The variable means is controlled by the variable game execution means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including a predetermined number of variable motions. The execution period of one or more first variable actions in a specific variable pattern is such that the game ball fired in the first direction can reach after the specific variable pattern is started, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, it becomes difficult for the game ball shot in the second direction to reach.

As a result, when the game ball is shot in the second direction, the chances of the game ball entering the ball-entering means are reduced compared to when the game ball is shot in the first direction. It has the effect of making you think.

In the gaming machine E6, as a game state after execution of the variable game is completed, a first game state is set when a game ball does not enter the ball-entering means in the variable game of 1; game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game of Machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, as a gaming state after execution of the variable game is completed, a game is played when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the first variable game. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in one variable game, the second game state is set by the game state setting means more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the game can be played while the variable game is being executed, paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the first flow path allows the falling game ball to reach the ball entry means from the third direction, and the second flow path allows the falling game ball to reach the third direction. The variable means is configured so that a game ball can flow down its upper surface while being varied to the second position, and The fourth direction side is inclined so as to be higher than the third direction side. , in a state in which a game ball can be entered from above and the variable means is variable to the second position, the variable means blocks the upper part, and the variable means is , the gaming machine E8 is variable from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, while the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path reaches the ball entry means from the fourth direction different from the third direction. and reach. While the variable means is variable to the second position, the variable means is inclined so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface thereof, and the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. are placed. The ball entry means is configured so that a game ball can be entered from above when the variable means is changed to the first position. Further, in a state in which the variable means is varied to the second position, the upper part of the ball-entering means is blocked by the variable means. By sliding from the fourth direction side to the third direction side, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position.

As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball arriving from the third direction side to enter the ball entering means while the variable means is changing to the first position, while the game ball arriving from the fourth direction side enters the ball. becomes easier. Therefore, during the execution of the variable game, the possibility of the game ball reaching the ball-entering means entering the ball-entering means is higher when the game ball is shot in the second direction than in the first direction. There is an effect that it can be made higher.

<Characteristic group F> (Right-handed hits during a big win are more advantageous than left-handed hits in some respects, but are more disadvantageous than left-handed hits in other respects.)
A shooting means capable of shooting at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and determination by the determination means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of (1) and a first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game are included in the execution period of the privilege game. a first element advantageous means for making it more advantageous for the player to keep shooting game balls in the first direction than to keep shooting game balls in the second direction during a specific period; A second element, which is different from the element, is advantageous to the player if the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction rather than in the first direction during the specific period. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising a two-element advantageous means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening is a winning, the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times to shift to a winning state. there is something In such a conventional type of gaming machine, by allowing a game ball to enter the big winning hole during the winning state, a predetermined benefit such as a prize ball is given to the player, which is advantageous to the player. A state can be made to play a pleasure.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the shooting means is configured to be capable of shooting at least game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means when the judgment by the judging means results in a specific judgment result. The first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game is that the game balls are continuously shot in the first direction rather than the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. is advantageous by the first element advantageous means. The second element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game is that the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction rather than the game balls are continuously shot in the first direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. is advantageous by the second element advantageous means.

As a result, the game ball can be shot in the first direction to the player who wants to make the first element advantageous during execution of the privilege game, while the game ball can be shot to the player who wants to make the second element advantageous. Game balls can be shot in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide game characteristics that suit the tastes of each player.

In the gaming machine F1, a ball entering means provided at a position where at least the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the ball entering means and a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and the ball entering means rather than the first position A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball, and a variable that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined first number of times during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine F2 comprising: a control means;

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means. The variable means is varied between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where entering the ball into the ball entering means is more difficult than in the first position. During execution of the privilege game, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the variable control means a predetermined first number of times.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, so there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the privilege game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the first element advantageous making means is more likely to continue shooting game balls in the first direction than to keep shooting game balls in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. increases the percentage of balls entering the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, it is better for the game balls to be continuously shot in the first direction than to be continuously shot in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the rate of entering a ball into the ball entering means is increased by the first element advantage making means, the game is suitable for players who want to play a game with a high rate of entering a ball into the entering means during execution of the privilege game. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be actively shot in the first direction.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second element advantageous means is more likely to continue shooting game balls in the second direction during the specific period than to keep shooting game balls in the first direction. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the number of game balls reaching said ball entering means is increased.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is better to keep shooting the game balls in the second direction than to shoot the game balls in the first direction during the specific period. Since the number of game balls reaching the ball entering means is increased by the second element advantage making means, the second direction is actively offered to the player who wants more game balls to reach the ball entering means. There is an effect that the game ball can be fired.

In the game machine F4, the variable control means performs the first variable operation in which the variable means is varied to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was varied to the first position. The second element advantageous means is that the game ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific period is executed the first number of times during the specific period. It suppresses reaching the ball-entering means until the execution period of the variable action ends, and at least part of the execution period of the first variable action of the predetermined number of times is the specific period. A gaming machine F5 characterized by a period in which a game ball launched in the second direction can reach after the start.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was varied to the first position, the variable control means performs the first variable operation to the second position the first number of times during the specific period. be done. The second element advantageous means ensures that the game ball shot in the first direction from the start of the specific period reaches the ball entering means during the period until the execution period of the first variable action of a predetermined number of times is completed. Suppressed. At least part of the execution period of the first variable action of the predetermined number of times is constituted by a period during which the game ball launched in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

Thus, shooting the game ball in the second direction allows the game ball to reach the ball entering means during execution of the first variable action more times than shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to obtain more opportunities for the ball to enter the ball-entering means.

In the gaming machine F5, the second element advantageous means is such that the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entering means is longer than the game ball shot in the second direction. A gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the flowing speed of the game ball shot in the first direction is suppressed so as to be longer than the period until reaching the entering ball means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball-entering means is the same as that of the game ball shot in the second direction. Since the flowing speed of the game ball shot in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantageous means so as to be longer than the period until it reaches the means, the game ball shot in the first direction is suppressed. , it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from reaching the ball-entering means before the end of the predetermined number of first variable motions. Therefore, shooting the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chances of making the ball enter the ball entering means more reliably.

In the game machine F5 or F6, the first variable operation has a predetermined period from the start of the variable from the second position to the first position to the end of the variable to the first position. The variable means is variable so as to be the second period, and the first element advantageous means is such that the game ball shot in the second direction enters the ball entering means during the second period. The game ball launched in the first direction is more likely to enter the ball entering means if it reaches the ball entering means during the second period. Characterized game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is configured so that the period from the start of the variable movement from the second position to the first position to the end of the variable movement to the first position is the predetermined second period. is variable. The game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period more than the game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period. The first element advantageous means makes it easier to enter the ball into the ball entering means.

Thereby, when the game ball is shot in the first direction, in addition to the first period during which the variable means is varied to the first position, it is also during the second period during which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball entering means, the period during which the ball can enter the ball entering means can be lengthened by shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, when the game ball is shot in the first direction, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball reaching the ball-entering means entering the ball-entering means as compared to when the game ball is shot in the second direction. effective.

In the gaming machine F7, a first flow path through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down and the flowed-down game ball reaches the ball entering means from a third direction; a second flow path through which a game ball that has been shot can flow down, and that allows the game ball that has flowed down to reach the ball-entering means from a fourth direction different from the third direction; While being varied to the second position, the upper surface is configured so that game balls can flow down, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. The ball entry means allows a game ball to enter from above in a state in which the variable means is changed to the first position, and the variable means is at the second position. , the upper part is blocked by the variable means, and the first element advantageous means is directed from the third direction side to the fourth direction side. The game machine F8 is characterized in that the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means from the third direction through the first flow path. A game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entering means from a fourth direction different from the third direction through the second flow path. While the variable means is variable to the second position, a game ball can be placed on its upper surface. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. When the variable means is varied to the first position, a game ball can enter the ball entering means from above, while when the variable means is varied to the second position, the ball entering means is blocked by the variable means. When the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantage means.

As a result, the game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction during the second period is returned to the fourth direction by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball-entering means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entering means becomes ready to enter the ball from above earlier than the fourth direction side. It is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball that has reached the ball entering means. Therefore, the game ball shot in the first direction can have a higher ball-entering rate when reaching the ball-entering means more reliably than the game ball shot in the second direction.

In any one of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, when the game ball does not enter the ball entering means during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the second A game state setting means for setting one game state and setting a second game state more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the privilege game of the one. A gaming machine F8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game of 1. When the ball is not entered, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of one privilege game, the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entering means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that the game can be played while the privilege game is being executed, paying attention to whether or not it is played.

<Characteristic G group> (On the right side, there are routes that are easy to win electric chews but difficult for attackers, and routes that are easy for attackers to win prizes but difficult to win electric chews.)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first flow path through which the game ball shot by the shooting means with a shooting intensity within a specific range can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path is difficult to enter; a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball means; a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means; A variable means that can be varied between the first ball-entering means and a second position at which it is difficult to enter a ball; a variable control means for varying the position; A gaming machine G1 comprising: a ball-entering means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of ball entrances on the board surface. More specifically, there are starting openings that trigger a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a winning state, and large winning openings that allow game balls to enter when the state shifts to a winning state. Some have multiple entrances that are controlled differently depending on the situation. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the ball entrance to be aimed at is changed according to the game state, the player can be given the pleasure of being able to point the shooting direction in accordance with the game state.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to keep shooting game balls in the shooting direction according to the current game state until the game state is changed, the game becomes monotonous, and the player cannot However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest in the game.

There is also a method of providing a specific ball entrance in which a plurality of shooting directions in which a game ball can enter is set, and in at least one game state, a game is played by aiming at the specific ball entrance. Although it is conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in board configuration is reduced due to a plurality of flow paths leading to a specific ball entrance.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, a game ball fired by the shooting means with a firing intensity within a specific range can flow down the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path. Become. The first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter and the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path cannot enter. A predetermined privilege is given by a privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where the ball entering the first ball entering means is more difficult than the first position. there is The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. The second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter and the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to enter.

As a result, since game balls may flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path by shooting the game balls with the firing intensity within the specific range, attention is drawn to the downflow direction of the game balls. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G1, the first flow path allows a game ball shot with a firing intensity within a first range included in the specific range to flow down, and the second flow path allows the game ball to flow down within the specific range. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a game ball that is included in the game ball and is shot with a shooting intensity within a second range different from the first range can flow down.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball shot with the shooting intensity within the first range included in the specific range can flow down the first flow path. Also, a game ball that is included in the specific range and is launched with a launch intensity within a second range that is different from the first range can flow down the second flow path.

As a result, the path into which the game ball flows can be varied depending on whether the game ball is shot with the launch intensity within the first range or the game ball is shot with the launch intensity within the second range. The game ball can be made to flow into any flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G2, a third flow path through which a game ball fired with a firing intensity outside the specific range can flow down and it is difficult for the flowed down game ball to enter the second ball entering means. and that the game ball has entered any one of the third ball entering means, the second ball entering means, and the third ball entering means that the game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. and one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined set condition. and a game state setting means for setting the game state, wherein the first game state is higher than the rate at which the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path enters the second ball entering means. A game ball that has flowed down the flow path is more likely to enter the third ball entering means. The percentage of game balls flowing down the second flow path that enter the second ball entering means is higher than the percentage of entering balls, and the variable control means is determined by the determination by the determination means. A game machine characterized in that the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times, when the specific condition is established when the determination result of G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third flow path is configured so that a game ball shot with a shooting intensity outside the specific range can flow down. The game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter the third ball entering means, and it becomes difficult to enter the second ball entering means. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means. One game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined set condition. be done. In the first game state, the proportion of game balls flowing down the second flow path entering the third ball entering means is higher than the proportion of game balls flowing down the second flow path entering the second ball entering means. higher. In the second game state, the ratio of game balls flowing down the second channel entering the second ball entering means is higher than the ratio of game balls flowing down the third channel entering the third ball entering means. get higher A variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable control means when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the determination means.

As a result, in the first game state, it is better to flow down the third flow path, so that the determination by the determination means can be efficiently performed, while in the second game state, it is better to flow down the second flow path. The discrimination by the discrimination means can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy switching the shooting direction of the game ball according to the game state.

In the gaming machine G3, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter. A gaming machine G4 characterized by:

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the first ball entry means is placed at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter. Since it is provided, there is an effect that the player can select the desired flow path during execution of the variable game.

In the gaming machine G4, the period until the game ball shot toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entering means is the time period for the game ball shot toward the third flow path to reach the first ball entering means. 1. A game machine G5, characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing the flow of the game ball in the first flow path so as to be longer than the period until reaching the first ball entering means.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, the period until the game ball launched toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entering means is extended toward the third flow path. Since the flow of the game ball in the first flow path is suppressed by the suppressing means so that the period until the launched game ball reaches the first ball entering means is longer than the period, the first time is early during execution of the variable game. For a player who wants to reach the first ball entry means, the game ball can be shot aiming at the third flow path, while for a player who wants to enjoy the variable game for a longer time. There is an effect that the game ball can be shot aiming at the first flow path.

In the gaming machine G5, the shooting means is capable of shooting game balls at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a specific shooting interval, and the variable control means is adapted to control the variable means to the second A first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of game balls entering the ball entry means after being varied from the position to the first position. and control means, during execution of the variable game, based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is changed to the first position. A second variable control means for varying between two positions, wherein the specific period is the specific number of game balls that are shot at the specific shooting interval after the game balls are started to be shot toward the first flow path. is longer than the period until the game ball finishes flowing down the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot game balls at a shooting interval equal to or longer than a specific shooting interval. During the execution of the variable game, after the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position, a first variable control is performed based on a predetermined specific number or more of game balls entering the ball entering means. The variable means is varied to the second position by the means. Also, during the execution of the variable game, based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period from the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position, the variable means is set to the second position by the second variable control means is changed to The specific period is longer than the period from when the game balls are started to be shot toward the first flow path to when the specific number of game balls shot at a specific shooting interval finish flowing down the first flow path. is configured to be

Thereby, when game balls are shot into the first flow path, it is possible to prevent the variable means from being changed to the first position before the specific number of game balls reach the first ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the predetermined privilege given when a game ball is shot into the first flow path during execution of the variable game.

In any one of the game machines G4 to G6, the first ball-entering means, when the variable means is variable to the first position, moves the game ball flowing down the third flow path to the first ball-entering means. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that it is constructed so that the percentage of game balls that flow down the flow path is higher.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G4 to G6, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball that has flowed down the third flow path Since the first ball-entering means is constructed so that the game ball that has flowed down the path is more likely to enter the ball, the variable game is being executed for the player who does not want to generate a waste ball. There is an effect that the game ball can be shot aiming at the first flow path.

In any one of gaming machines G3 to G7, a third position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. a variable second variable means; and control means for controlling the second variable means to vary from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of a first condition; The game machine G8 is characterized in that the first game state is a state in which the first condition is less likely to be satisfied than the second game state.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second variable means is configured to be variable between the third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and the fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. It is Based on the establishment of the first condition, the control means controls the second variable means to vary from the fourth position to the third position. It is configured such that the first condition is less likely to be satisfied in the first game state than in the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, the determination by the determination means can be performed more reliably and efficiently by allowing the third flow path to flow down, while in the second game state, the second flow path is allowed to flow down. There is an effect that the discrimination by the discriminating means can be efficiently executed more reliably.

<Feature H Group> (Notify the launch direction of the corresponding digestion time according to the aspect of the jackpot effect)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first flow path through which the game ball shot in a first direction by the shooting means can flow, and a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction by the shooting means. a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down; specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on the establishment of the first condition; and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, a specific period end means for ending the specific period based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established when a game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path; a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in the second specific effect, and as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect are included. It is executed by type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types, suggesting effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect suggesting the shooting direction of the game ball during the specific period, and the suggesting effect executing means. As the suggesting effect, a first suggesting effect suggesting the first direction is determined based on the determination of the first specific effect by the type determining means, and a first suggesting effect suggesting the first direction is determined based on the determination of the second specific effect. a suggestive effect determining means for determining a second suggestive effect suggesting the second direction by using the game machine H1.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of ball entrances on the board surface. More specifically, there are starting openings that trigger a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a winning state, and large winning openings that allow game balls to enter when the state shifts to a winning state. Some have multiple entrances that are controlled differently depending on the situation. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the ball entrance to be aimed at is changed according to the game state, the player can be given the pleasure of being able to point the shooting direction in accordance with the game state.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to keep shooting game balls in the shooting direction according to the current game state until the game state is changed, the game becomes monotonous, and the player cannot However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest in the game.

There is also a method of providing a specific ball entrance in which a plurality of shooting directions in which a game ball can enter is set, and in at least one game state, a game is played by aiming at the specific ball entrance. Although it is conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in board configuration is reduced due to a plurality of flow paths leading to a specific ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine H1, the game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball can flow down the first flow path, and is shot in the second direction different from the first direction by the shooting means. The game ball can flow down the second flow path. A specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the establishment of the first condition, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, the game ball passes through the first flow path or the second flow path. The specific period is ended by the specific period ending means based on the establishment of the second condition that can be satisfied when the water flows down. A specific effect is executed by a specific effect executing means during a specific period. As the type of the specific performance executed by the specific performance executing means, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a first specific performance and a second specific performance different from the first specific performance. In a specific period, a suggestive effect that suggests the shooting direction of the game ball is executed by the suggestive effect executing means. As the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, the first suggestive effect suggesting the first direction is determined by the suggestive effect determining means based on the first specific effect being determined by the type determining means. , a second suggesting effect suggesting a second direction is determined based on the determination of the second specific effect.

As a result, an appropriate firing direction can be suggested by the suggestive effect according to the type of the specific effect, so there is an effect that the effect mode can be preferably set.

The game machine H1 includes a ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the second condition is , can be established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the second flow path allows the game ball that has flowed down to enter the ball entering means more than the first flow path. The game machine H2 is characterized in that it is configured such that the period until reaching the target is likely to be long.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down through the first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down through the second flow path can enter. The second condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. The second flow path is configured such that the period until the game ball that has flowed down reaches the ball entry means is likely to be longer than the first flow path.

Thus, when the second specific performance is determined, the period until the second condition is satisfied can be relatively extended, so that a sufficient performance period for executing the second specific performance can be secured. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine H2, it is variable between a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. variable means, determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and said variable means being changed from said second position to said first position based on a specific determination result obtained by determination by said determination means. and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times, and the specific period setting means sets the specific period by considering that the execution of the variable game is started as the first condition is met. A gaming machine H3 characterized by:

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter into the ball entering means than at the first position. It is A variable game in which a determination is performed by a determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable means is varied from a second position to a first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. It is executed by variable game executing means. The specific period is set by the specific period setting means when the execution of the variable game is started as the first condition is satisfied.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably set the effect mode during execution of the variable game.

In either gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is satisfied when a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the ball-entering means after the first condition is satisfied. Characterized game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of either the game machine H2 or H3, the second condition is that a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the ball entry means after the first condition is established. is established, the period until the second condition is established can be made longer by shooting the game ball in the second direction than by shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect can be secured.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means operable by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. an operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period for validating an operation to the means, wherein the second specific effect is one of a plurality of effect modes according to the operation content of the operation means. and execution of selected effect for executing one effect mode selected by the player during execution of the second specific effect based on the establishment of the second condition. A game machine H5 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, the operation effective period setting means sets the operation valid period during which the operation to the operating means is valid during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is composed of the effect of allowing the player to select one effect mode according to the operation content of the operating means from among a plurality of effect modes. Based on the establishment of the second condition, one performance mode selected by the player during execution of the second specific performance is executed by the selected performance executing means.

As a result, when the second specific effect is executed, the player can select the desired effect mode as the effect mode to be executed after the second condition is established, so that the second condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game later can be improved.

In the game machine H5, display means capable of displaying images is provided, and the second specific effect is such that a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means, and the plurality of images are displayed on the display means. One of the images includes at least a display mode in which one of the images is displayed in a specific display mode, and the specified and an image displayed in the specific display mode based on detection of an operation of a second operation content on the operation means during the operation valid period. and an execution setting means for setting an effect mode corresponding to the image displayed as an effect mode to be executed by the selected effect execution means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second specific effect includes at least a display mode in which a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means, and one of the plurality of images is displayed in a specific mode. include. The image displayed in the specific display mode is changed by the mode changing means based on detection of the operation of the first operation content on the operation means during the operation valid period. Based on the detection of the operation of the second operation content on the operation means during the operation effective period, the effect mode corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode is set by the execution setting means by the selected effect execution means. It is set as an effect mode to be executed.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily select an image and determine an effect by varying the operation contents of the operation means.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means operable by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. an operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period for validating an operation to the means, wherein the second specific effect includes at least an effect mode for prompting a predetermined operation to the operation means. Game machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determination means, the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period during which the operation to the operating means is valid during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect includes at least an effect mode for prompting a predetermined operation on the operating means.

As a result, the player can actively operate the operating means during execution of the second specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In game machines H5 to H7, an operation determination means for determining whether or not an operation for the operation means has been executed during the operation effective period; determination control means for controlling such that the first suggestive effect is determined by the suggestive effect executing means when the means does not determine that the operation to the operating means has been executed. Machine H8.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H5 to H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation determination means determines whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation means during the operation valid period. Determination control means for determining a first suggestive effect by the suggestive effect executing means when the operation determining means has not determined that the operation for the operating means has been executed continuously over at least a predetermined number of operation effective periods. controlled by

As a result, it is possible to determine the type of suggestive effect in consideration of the tendency of the player to operate the operating means, so there is an effect that the effect mode can be set more favorably.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z2 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving a player a big winning game. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first flow path through which the game ball shot in a first direction by the shooting means flows down, and a second flow path through which game balls shot in a second direction different from the first direction by the shooting means can flow; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on the establishment of a first condition; After the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, the second condition that can be established when the game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path is established. A specific period ending means for ending a specific period, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect during the specific period, and a first specific effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, A type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect different from the first specific effect, and executing a suggestive effect suggesting the shooting direction of the game ball during the specific period. and a first suggestive effect that suggests the first direction based on the fact that the first specific effect is determined by the type determining means as the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means. and determining means for determining a second suggestive effect suggesting the second direction based on the determination of the second specific effect.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter. The second condition can be established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the second flow path is the first flow path Rather, the period until the game ball that has flowed down reaches the ball entering means is more likely to be longer.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a specific determination result obtained by determination by the determination means. and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the specific period setting means, the execution of the variable game is started. The specific period is set by considering that the first condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the second condition is that a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the ball entering means after the first condition is satisfied. It is established when the ball is entered.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the second specific effect is determined by the operation means operable by the player and the type determining means. and operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period during which the operation to the operation means is valid during the execution period of the second specific effect, wherein the second specific effect includes a plurality of effect modes. The game is played during execution of the second specified effect based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied. A selected effect executing means for executing one effect mode selected by a player is provided.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a first flow path through which the game ball shot in a first direction by the shooting means can flow down, and the shooting means A second flow path through which a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, a specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on the establishment of a first condition, and the specific period setting After the specific period is set by the means, the specific period is terminated based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established when the game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path. a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect during the specific period; and a first specific effect as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, A type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect different from the effect, and a suggestive effect execution for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the shooting direction of the game ball during the specific period. means, and as the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect execution means, a first suggestive effect suggesting the first direction is determined based on the fact that the first specific effect is determined by the type determining means, suggesting effect determination means for determining a second suggesting effect suggesting the second direction based on the determination of the second specific effect.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the game balls flowing down the first flow path and the game balls flowing down the second flow path A ball entry means is provided at a position where a ball can be entered, and the second condition can be established based on a game ball entering the ball entry means, and the second flow path is configured such that the period until the game ball that has flowed down reaches the ball entering means is likely to be longer than in the first flow path.
Thus, when the second specific performance is determined, the period until the second condition is established can be made relatively long, so that a sufficient performance period for executing the second specific performance can be secured. It has the effect of being able to
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and the first position A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means, a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a specific determination by the determination means. and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means varies from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the determination result, and the specific period setting means includes the variable The specific period is set when the first condition is met when the execution of the game is started.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably set the effect mode during execution of the variable game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, the second condition is predetermined to the ball-entering means after the first condition is established. Since it is established when a specific number of game balls are entered, it is better to shoot the game ball in the second direction than to shoot the game ball in the first direction until the second condition is satisfied. period can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect can be secured.
According to the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 4, the operation means operable by the player and the second an operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period during which the operation to the operation means is effective during the execution period of the second specific effect when the specific effect is determined, the second specific effect; is composed of an effect in which the player selects one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes according to the operation content of the operating means, and based on the establishment of the second condition, the second A selected performance executing means for executing one performance mode selected by a player during execution of a specific performance is provided.
As a result, when the second specific performance is executed, the player can select the performance mode that the player prefers as the performance mode to be executed after the second condition is established, so that the second condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game later can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
111 payout control device (part of privilege giving means)
112 launch control device (launching means)
650a right specific prize winning port (entering ball means)
650f1 opening/ closing door (part of the first element advantage means, variable means)
700 detour accessories (part of the second factor advantage means)
S214 Bonus game execution means S305 Determination means
S1103 A part of the first element advantageous means, variable control means
Part of S1203 privilege giving means

Claims (1)

In a game machine having shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area,
a first flow path through which game balls shot by the shooting means can flow; and a second flow path different from the first flow path;
a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter;
It is variable between a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where the game ball enters the first ball entering means more difficult than the first position. a first variable means;
a second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter;
It is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than the third position. a second variable means;
a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition;
Advantageous game execution means for executing a series of advantageous games advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result;
A first benefit is given based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means during execution of a predetermined advantageous game, and the second ball entering means is entered during execution of the predetermined advantageous game. and privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege having a lower degree of advantage than the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball;
During execution of the predetermined advantageous game, when a first variable condition is established while the second variable means is varied to the fourth position, the first variable means is varied to the first position. a first variable execution means for causing
During execution of the predetermined advantageous game, when the second variable condition is satisfied while the first variable means is varied to the second position, the second input is performed rather than the first ball input means. a second variable execution means capable of varying the second variable means so as to form a state in which a game ball is highly likely to enter the ball means ;
In the gaming machine, as a condition for varying the second variable means from the third position to the fourth position, after the second variable means is varied to the third position, the second input A first condition established when a specific number of game balls entering the ball means is detected, and a first condition established when a predetermined period of time elapses after the second variable means is varied to the third position. and at least a second condition,
The second variable execution means, at least when the second variable condition is established during execution of the predetermined advantageous game, the game ball in a specific direction in which the game ball can flow into the second flow path. The configuration is characterized in that the second variable means can be varied in a predetermined variable manner such that the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition even if the projectile continues to be fired. Amusement machine.

Images